Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 2001-R0296 - Contract For 19Th St. Senior Citizens Center Renovations - Pharr & Co. - 07/12/2001
Resolution No. 2001-RO296 July 12, 2001 Item No. 44 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Contract for the 19' Street Senior Citizens Center Renovations, by and between the City of Lubbock and Pharr & Company of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 12th ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilman, rchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Contract Manager/Attorney gs/ccdocs/Contract-Phan & Co.res June 29, 2001 day of July , 2001. &rAme'llIrms.% "Wo, �'► CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR 19th STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS ITB #164-01/RS BOND CHECK BEST RATING � LICENSED I TEXAS DATE BY " A Ci t y Of Planned Progress" CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 162513 TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http:l/purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ITB #164-01/RS, 19th Street Senior Citizens Center Renovations ADDENDUM #1 ITB #164-01 /RS 19th Street Senior Citizens Center Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: June 21, 2001 CLOSE DATE: June 27, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please note the following clarifications: a) The Center will be open during construction. b) The entrances and restrooms can be renovated at the same time, eliminating the need for this work to be done in phases. C) All exterior brick work shall be done as indicated on the plans and specifications. 2. Contractor will be allowed to complete work in Toilets 103 and 104 concurrently. 3. The drawings indicate the eastern leaf of doors number 1 & 2 to be accessible. See mark "A" in door swing indicator. 4. Drawings, Sheet G2, Bollard details 05 and 06 shall be equal to Dura Art Stone -non illuminated Model PB 35 (the bollards will not require power). r., All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 164-01Rsaddl CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID 1301 TITLE: 19th STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ITB NUMBER: 164-01/RS PROJECT NUMBER: 9695.8302.20000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT p" INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS """ 10. SPECIFICATIONS NOTICE TO BIDDERS 0 PM NOTICE TO BIDDERS 4014 ITB #164-01/RS Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 .�, o'clock p.m. on the 27th day of June, 2001, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project with a budget amount of $125.000.00: "19th STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 27th day of June, 2001, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 12th day of July, 2001, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or su erior. Bidders are required, whether or not payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. ° It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre-bid conference on 19th day of June, 2001 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock, Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13'h Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00 refundable charge per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained through Landress Architecture, Inc., 1720 Avenue M, Lubbock, Texas 79401, Phone: (806) 747-0991. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775- 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 BID DELIVERY. TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish 19th STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 27th day of June, 2001 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner:. "ITB #164-011RS, 19th STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum "" 2 PRE-BID MEETING - 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non-mandatorypre-bid meeting will be held at 10:00 a.m. June 19th. 2001 in Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock. Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre-bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre-bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre-bid meeting. PON 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. 1 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In — the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. — 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. CONFLICT OF INTEREST 8.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. -- 8.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. zo 9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 9.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 10 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 11 BIDDERINQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 11.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language requirements etc or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 11.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 1625 131h Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax:.: (806) 775-2164 Email: rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us Am 12 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 12.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within ONE HUNDRED FIFTY (150) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued ^+ by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 12.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 13 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the �* contract documents. 14 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve 3 the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 16 GUARANTEES 16.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 16.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 16.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- _ contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 16.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or — any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 17 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. — 18 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. .,, 20 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 21 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 22 EXPLOSIVES 22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 22.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. r+ 24 INSURANCE 24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right .�+. to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide 0" 5 to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 25 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the _ Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on _ weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 26 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each, week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 27 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 28 PREPARATION FOR BID 28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 0 r 28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 28.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. 29 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. (j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered "^ incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 30 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. O 7 31 BID AWARD 31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the Total Bid Amount. 31.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in.disqualification of the bid. 31.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the — State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. 0 Omit BID SUBMITTAL .0% om it BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT am DATE: June 27 20Q1 PROJECT NUMBER: #164-011RS -19th STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS Bid of Pharr Construction Co ,Inc d/b/a Pharr & Company (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a 19th STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and ail other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the pians, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. �% ��,3 e>1-� MATERIALS: ai SERVICES: 36 TOTAL BID (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. in case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govem.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 150 (ONE HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby .further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $0 (ZERO) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. i Bidder understands. that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. �• The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled dosing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on „� which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% of Total Amount Bid Dollars ($ -5% - ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of - receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE; ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. (Sea] if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secre ry Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. 1 Date 06-21-01 Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date 'K" MIwBE Firm: ii Date: _June 27, 2001 Au rized Signa re Jimmy R. Pharr (Printed or Typed Name) Pharr Construction Co., Inc. d/b/a Pharr & Company Company P- 0- Pnx 2791 Address Lubbock Lubbock City, County Texas 79408 State Zip Code Telephone: eof- 73_5263 Fax: 806 _763-5843 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder And Attached to Bid Submittal 1, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. JimW R. Pharr Co ctor (Si ature} .Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Pharr Construction Co., Inc. d/b/a Pharr & Conpany (Print or Type } CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: P. O. Box 2791 Lubbock, Texas 79408 Name of Agent/Broker: Bolev-Featherston Insurance Address of Agent/Broker: P. O. Drawer 10 City/State/Zip: Wichita Falls, Texas 76307 Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 800 ) 234-1167 ** Date: June 27, 2001 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR I W If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. 11 BID #164-01/RS -19th STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS 4 r City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ITB #164-01/RS, 1V Street Senior Citizens Center Renovations ADDENDUM #1 ITB #164-01 /RS 19th Street Senior Citizens Center Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: June 21, 2001 CLOSE DATE: June 27, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please note the following clarifications: a) The Center will be open during construction. b) The entrances and restrooms can be renovated at the same time, eliminating the need for this work to be done in phases. C) All exterior brick work shall be done as indicated on the plans and specifications. 2. Contractor will be allowed to complete work in Toilets 103 and 104 concurrently. 3. The drawings indicate the eastern leaf of doors number 1 & 2 to be accessible. See mark "A" in door swing indicator. 4. Drawings, Sheet G2, Bollard details 05 and 06 shall be equal to Dura Art Stone -non illuminated Model PB 35 (the bollards will not require power). All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK r Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. r" 164-01Rsaddl THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A310 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company, 907 North Avenue Q Dr., Lubbock, TX 79403 as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. 8144 Walnut Hill Lane #1199, LB99 Dallas, Texas, 75231-4345 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety) a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of *** FIVE PERCENT OF BID AMOUNT *** Dollars( 5% ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for (Here insert full name, address and description of project) 19 STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS ITB #164-01 / RS NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee, shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee, ,. in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee, the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee, may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 27th day of June, 2001 Pharr Construction Co. Inc. dba Pharr & Company ��, a (Priv ' a (Seal) (Witness) llion K. Pharr (Title) Vice President Fit and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters. (surety) (saaq nnR (Witness) - ;Staci Gross (Title) Attorney -in -Fact AIA DOCUMENT A310 - BID BOND - AIA ® - FEBRUARY 1970 ED - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006 .� Printed on Recycled Paper 9193 meStPaul Power of Attorney No. POWER OF ATTORNEY Seaboard Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company 20290 United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Certificate No. / �t-� ) � r,�� ( V `t 6 -1 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Donal Boley, Steve Deal and Staci Gross Wichita Falls Texas of the City of , State , their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to, esignedati�sealed ti " 1St day of December 1999 Seaboard Surety Company rc J7nited States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insur Comppuy Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insuran& pa Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Mercury Insurance Copy v k SURFTy ajf7tlE \Nw._�!!SG JQ'+ INS�Aq p pv YA'YO TY �' ��QRFOrtA>e�2 io,eGORPORATE .�t' � F4_ .Q W 1951 JOHN F. PHINNEY, Vice President q 19270A",, h 1f t `:.SEAL; a°'� t� 1977 °HronaTto `SEAL,;as State of Maryland City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary On this 1St day of December 1, 1999 , before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared John F. Phinney and Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of said Companies; and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 13th clay of July, 2002. 86203 Rev. 7-2000 Printed in U.S.A. NEA Qpm No), o 03 Pueucy s CiT`i �O REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA, Notary Public This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. on September 2, 1998, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorney(s)-in-Fact pursuant. to a Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or any Vice President, or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attorney(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached; and RESOLVED FURTHER, that Attorney(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of Attorney issued them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attorney(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company. I, Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand this 26th day of June 2001 su rry �WNE \gyp '"So APs q.' Ty �Pl t �y � •W: OR 927y�•� d COWCaATF �t _. :mf ,a ._ i a �"camoa4 1977 ��j NCORATED C b 1896 s�` 1�!! $ y.9s Arr+ Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800. 1=384' and ask the -6, o tor-heyAtclerk. Please refer to the Power of Attorney number, the above-named individuals and the details o the bond to which; e �i attaoecf, `� ow„ PAYMENT BOND now-_, SOND CHECK f BEST RATING.. LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE BY STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253 OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (PUBLIC WORKS) (Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE HUNDRED THIRTEEN THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED DOLLAR $) $113,619.00 ) NINETEEN AND NO/100THS for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, Dated the 12th day of July 2001 to BID #164-01/RS - 19TH STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW TBEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions, conditions and limitations of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed this instrument this �- 18th day of July 2001 Phar onstruction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & C�mpar;f . (Priricipal) By7f X Fid it a d Gu ranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. (Surety) By Staci Gross attorney -in -Fact Yom.• Fes.. No Text P^ l: 7heStftl POWER OF ATTORNEY Seaboard Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Power of Attorney No. 20290 United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Certificate No. J KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Donal Boley, Steve Deal and Staci Gross Wichita Falls Texas of the City of , State their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings re ed or e fitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrumen e "tn*0-sealer 1St day of DCCembeI 1999 Seaboard Surety Companyiited States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insur i omp� Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insnran a pang Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Mercury Insurance 0 �ry y,(��..lr O\'W.�.Mf49 OP��NSUpq�•' ����j * � �y W -*_ QOR VOR '> P:' pPOR9Tn�•- ' e 1 s'4 197J � JOHN F. PHINNEY, Vice President r� uu �` se =�• :ssAs;.� � � 1951 mr 3 ok moi:, ALf,'to s d•... .: 'a* pp,,.. .�Q \/7�,y/ �OFAFN� 18 �1S . ANVa f :ts....__ >•� �"+I ANtO`' � • i ' State of Maryland / City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary On this 1st day of December 199c , before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared John F. Phinney and Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St, Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of said Companies; and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers. �mby In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. m UBARy 4C My Commission expires the 13th day of July, 2002. �ip9f CdV a0 REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA, Notary Public 86203 Rev. 7-2000 Printed in U.S.A. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. on September 2, 1998, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorney(s)-in-Pact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or any Vice President, or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attorney(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached; and RESOLVED FURTHER, that Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of Attorney issued them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attorney(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company. I, Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand this 18th day of JULY 2001 SLl9ETy� l�+'-1 �-NSI G JQ'�.�n54gq .. 1927 g � � �iCCn-`�>e mS 3E. COpPORArf.:�2 OF S .' ra,A To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call I-1 the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to i Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary clerk. Please refer to the Power of Attorney number, IL W Z� n O � n i O LL O ® Z o o � 4 6' �N M LL OW ®O �t a LL T E 6W E" W w W Z a J1�, a W LL O LL O Q X' M LL O w 0 L' 701 Lamar Wichita Falls, Texas SfOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED IN TEXAS C) DATE _AL BY C4--tlf-- PERFORMANCE BOND STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253 OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (PUBLIC WORKS) (Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That re Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr &Company (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. PM (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE HUNDRED THIRTEEN THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED DOLLAR $) $113,619.00 NINETEEN AND NO/100THS for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. e WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated 12th day of July 2001 to BID #k164-01/RS - 19TH STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS MR which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions, conditions and limitations of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed this instrument this 18th day of July 2001 Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company, (Prircipal) BY Fid ity nd G ranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. (Surety) J/ Staci Gross - ' Attorney m radt n CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE m, )m: Becky Campbell At: Boley-Featherston insure nce To: JACKIE Fax#: (940) 3222131 Date: 8/9/01 04:21 PM Page 1 of 2 ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE CSR C24 CERTIFICATE PHARC-1 06/13/01 "RODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE >ioley Featherston Insurance HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR I P . 0. Box 97513 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. dPichita Falls T% 76307-7513 ?hone: 940-723-7111 Fax:940-322-9549 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE I A SURED INSURER Bituminous Casualty Corp INSURER B: RLI Insurance Pharr Construction Company Inc INSURER C: Amari.can Interstate Insurance P O BOX 2791 INSURER D: Great American South Inc Lubbock T% 79408 INSURER E: r-qOVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING AIN OCI't1110 C•ICAIT TCO\� 11C /f1\il'lIT1I\�1 /1C If�N .+f1r.1TG1.+T 11C /� MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. SR TR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE OlYY POLICY EXPIRATION DATE M1DO1Y LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S 1,000,000 A % COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLP3092945B 07/31/00 07/31/01 FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone tire) $ 50,000 CLAIMS MADE Fx] OCCUR MED EXP (Airy one person) $ 5,0()0 PERSONAL &ACV INJURY S1,000,000 GENERALAGGREGATE s2,000,000 GENLAGGREGATE LIMMAPPUES PER: PRODUCTS- COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 % POLICYPRO LOC JECT A L AUTOMOBILE % LIABILITY ANYAUTO CAP3092943B 07/31/00 07/31/01 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY $ (Per person) ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULEDAUTOS % % HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EAACC $ ANYAUTO AUTO ONLY. AGG S LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE s5,000,000 LEXCESS B % OCCUR F-1 CLAIMS MADE ERU0001381 07/31/00 07/31/01 AGGREGATE s5,000,000 $ $ DEDUCTIBLE % RETENTION $10,000 $ ,L_ - C WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY NCT%153839 08/01/00 07/31/01 WC STATU- OTH- TORY UMfTS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1000000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1000000 E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $ 1000000 OTHER D Equipment Floater TIMI038410 07/31/00 07/31/01 Scheduled $87,700. LD Builders Risk TIM1038410 07/31/00 07/31/01 All Risk $3.5Mi1/Loc ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSA.00ATIONSNEHICLES1EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENTISPECIAL PROVISIONS XE: 19TH STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS - BID #164-01/RS ZERTIFICATE HOLDER IS NAMED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED UNDER GENERAL LIABILITY & UTO LIABILITY. A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION APPLIES IN FAVOUR OF THECITY OF Lj1.TTRA(If'W FAR TF'F: f_1W W12ZT. T.TEATT.TTV nneTWVee 7ATTTn x17T% T.T^1!1� 0 CERTIFICATE HOLDER IN I ADDITIONAL INSURED: INSURER LETTER: CANCELLATION CITYLIl SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POUCHES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER VRLL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYSWRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL CITY OF LUBBOCK 2000 P O BOX 2000 IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR LUBBOCK T% 79457 REPRESENTATIVES. ,,,,,ACORD 25-S (7197) © ACORD CORPORATION 1998 )m: Becky Campbell At: Boley-Featherston Insuri nce To: JACKIE IMPORTANT Fax#: (940) 322.2131 Date: 8/9/01 04:21 PM Page 2 of 2 If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). LDISCLAIMER i The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between I the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it r affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. 25-S(7/97) CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANC C�-1 DA06�i3;0i IPRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Soley Featherston Insurance HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 1. O. Box 97513 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIESBELOW. 7ichita Falls TX 76307-7513 IPhone:940-723-7111 Fax:940-322-9549 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE Pharr Construction Company Inc P O BOX 2791 Lubbock TX 79408 `COVERAGES INSURERA: Bituminous Casualty Corp INSURER B: RLI Insurance INSURER C: American Interstate Insurance INSURER D: Great American South Inc INSURER E: THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFE TIVE DATE MMlDD POLICY EXPIRATI N DATE MMIDD/YY LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 k X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLP3092945B 07/31/00 07/31/01 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 50,000 CLAIMS MADE FR7 OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL BADV INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 GEN% AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 X POLICY PRO- JECT P, AUTOMOBILE X LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS CAP3092943B 07/31/00 07/31/01 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 (Ea accident) BODILY INJURY $ (Per person) X X HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ I L ANY AUTO LB EXCESS LIABILITY X OCCUR 7 CLAIMSMADE ERU0001381 07/31/00 07/31/01 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 AGGREGATE $5,000,000 S $ DEDUCTIBLE X RETENTION $10,000 $ C WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS* LIABILITY WCTX153839 08/01/00 07/31/01 WC STATU- H* TORY LIMITS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1000000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ 1000000 E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT 1 $ 1000000 OTHER D Equipment Floater TIM1038410 07/31/00 07/31/01 Scheduled $87,700. D Builders Risk TIM1038410 07/31/00 07/31/01 All Risk $3.5Mi1/Loc DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSNEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS 19TH STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS - BID #164-01/RS CERTIFICATE HOLDER IS NAMED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED UNDER GENERAL LIABILITY (AUTO LIABILITY. GEKTIFIGATE HOLDER I N I ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: CITYLII CITY OF LUBBOCK P O BOX 2000 LUBBOCK TX 79457 CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATIO DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. CORPORATION 1 1 " L L L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and a ; (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing s of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. ,� 3 No Text W CONTRACT e■* STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 12th day of July, 2001, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Pharr & Company of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #164-01/RS - 19th STREET SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER RENOVATIONS - $113,619.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: CIT UBBOCK, TE S R) By: Secretary MAY R s+ 4APP O AS TO CONTENT: w e esentative OVED AS TO FORM: City Attorney E, ATTEST: Cor ate Secretar m, CONTRACTOR: PHAR" COMPANY By: PRINtEAME:I�La; i 1&kjer' TITLE: lore --;i COMPLETE ADDRESS: Pharr & Company PO Box 2791 - Lubbock, Texas 79408 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit PHARR & COMPANY who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH FACILITIES MANAGER,'so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives., supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. ria 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless t otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents., SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made, suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance_ with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owners Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to. this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor._ The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written, objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) r-� calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION r- It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's ,Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE 17 18 The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and, all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is_essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall,be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation._ of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this, contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. .f 3 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. — The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor — shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by "- Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 4 0" 23, CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 00% 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to,mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost. 5 No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive _ compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids: 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall coverall operations in Connection with this contract, whether performed by'the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as an additional insured, or in the """ alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of cover age insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance 0" The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1.000.000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations '"" Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard POW Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, 0.00 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1.000.000.00 Combined Single Limit, ate! to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job 7 and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance 'coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilefs. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and 0 r, (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. _ 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance 9 Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. _ 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured._ (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form, (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental _ entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the �. governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of _ coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 10 Io (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers` compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 592/440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage; " and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will .,, provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the r Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.' (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate •, of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor:' (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the ,,,,,, project; and ll (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i) -(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 12 " 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES ""` The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the 40" Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as r-* the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shallbe considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of thiscontract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $0 (ZERO) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDVERSTOOD$BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THATTIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that 13 when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts 'of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in,full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made, allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated `circumstances; difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. ,No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's_ convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, _ area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to, be. done and material ... to be furnished hereunder. Where the ,estimated, guantities are shown . ._ , and onl:clearly. when same're expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for 1.estimating the probable cost othe work and for comparing e done and exe1resids offered for sly stated to behestimated, and only when same a e e presamount of work to sly stated to be est mated, i furnished undees o d and p agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under fhis'contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such, damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without — limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, 14 FAQ against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS _ No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment ismade, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS 43 44 On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT 15 The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the — amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. - Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's. Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's — Representative, said objections shall, be deemed denied..., Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the — 16 written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be ^^ delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall *' be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In cape _such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall ,�•. have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown tote due by them to the Owner, then all machinery,' equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at _ either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies — available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall — control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the -' prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus 18 i materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 19 CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS RE: RESOLUTION NO. 6262, ITEM NO. 39, APRIL 8, 1999 EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker Asbestos Supervisor Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator-Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer-Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified Hourly Rate 11.50 12.50 6.25 9.00 12.50 12.50 7.00 11.00 7.00 8.00 11.00 13.75 7.00 9.50 8.50 9.50 10.50 11.50 7.00 11.00 6.00 6.00 9.50 12.50 7.00 9.00 7.00 10.00 7.00 11.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 Asphalt Shoveler 6.00 Concrete Finisher 8.00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7.00 Electrician 12.00 Flagger 6.00 Form Setter 7.00 Form Setter -Helper 6.25 Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 8.00 Mechanic -Helper 7.00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.75 Bulldozer 8.00 Concrete Paving Machine 7.75 Front End Loader 7.25 Heavy Equipment Operator 8.00 Light Equipment Operator 7.25 Motor Grader Operator 9.50 Roller 6.75 Scraper 7.25 Tractor 7.25 Truck Driver -Light 6.50 Truck Driver -Heavy 7.00 Pa EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for leaal holidays shall be as reauired by the fair Labor Standards Act. r- �•• 3 SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT MANUAL CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS SENIOR CITIZEN'S CENTER RENOVATIONS EXPIRES 02/28/01 ED ARcy ti LAN DRESS ARCHITECTURE, INC. 1720 AVE. M LUBBOCK, TEXAS May 17, 2001 n SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER LANDRESS ARCHITECTURE LUBBOCK, TEXAS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS: EXPIRES 02/28/02 ��RED ARO CCn 8120 +P� F OF V' DIVISION TITLE PAGES DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 - Summary of Work -------------------------------------------------------1 thru 2 01019 - Contract Considerations -----------------------------------------------1 thru 3 01039 - Coordination and Meetings --------------------------------------------1 thru 5 01300 - Submittals-----------------------------------------------------------------1 thru 5 01400 - Quality Control ----------------------------------------------------------1 thru 2 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls -----------------1 thru 5 01600 - Material and Equipment ------------------------------------------------1 thru 2 01700 - Contract Close -out ------------------------------------------------------1 thru 3 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK - NOT USED DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 - Concrete Work ------------------------------------------------ _--- _ ----- 1 thru 14 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout ---------------------------------------------1 thru 4 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05500 - Metal Fabrications -------------------------------------------------- __--1 thru 5 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing ------------------------------------------1 thru 3 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07900 - Joint Sealers ------------------------------------------------------------1 thru 4 C:\Technical Specs\0011 sr\SPECINDX.doc DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08115 - Custom Steel Frames ---------------------------------------------------1 thru 4 08211 - Flush Wood Doors -------------------------------------------------------1 thru 4 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts -------------------------------1 thru 7 08460 - Automatic Entrance Devices ------------------------------------------1 thru 4 08710 - Door Hardware -----------------------------------------------------------1 thru 9 08800 - Glazing---------------------------------------------------------------------1 thru 5 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems -----------------------------------------------1 thru 6 09306 - Floor Tile-------------------------------------------------------------------1 thru 5 09307 - Wall Tile--------------------------------------------------------------------1 thru 5 09900 - Painting and Finishing --------------------------------------------------1 thru 7 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments --------------------------------------------1 thru 4 10441 - Plastic Signs --------------------------------------------------------------1 thru 2 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories -------------------------------------------1 thru 4 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - NOT USED DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS AND SEATING - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED C:\Technical Specs\0011sr\SPECINDX.doc 3 3 6 4 4 5 7 4 5 2 0011 Table of Contents MECHANICAL — DIVISION 15 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods 15060 Hangers And Supports ., 15083 Pipe Insulation 15140 Domestic Water Piping 15150 Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping 15410 Plumbing Fixtures 15430 Plumbing Specialties 15815 Metal Duds 15838 Power Ventilators 15855 Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles i i ..: .................................�. ............ 1� '�' ?s �,•� APR 3 3 6 4 4 5 7 4 5 2 0011 Table of Contents MECHANICAL — DIVISION 15 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods 5 16060 Grounding And Bonding 3 16120 Conductors And Cables 3 16130 Raceways And Boxes 4 16140 Wiring Devices 3 16442 Panelboards 4 16511 Interior Lighting 4 MICHAEL T. STRAHAN i •o:, 84881 SSO�ENSE •���.: Table of Contents ELECTRICAL — DIVISION 16 r Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work by Owner B. Owner supplied Products C. Contractor use of site and premises D. Future work E. Work Sequence F. Owner occupancy 1.2 CONTRACT DESIGN A. Contract Description without force and effect: The work consists of general construction including plumbing, mechanical and electrical work 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Access to Site B. Emergency Building Exits During Construction C. Construction Operations E. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Notify the Owner 48 hours in advance of any required outages. 1.4 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupy the site during the entire period of construction for the conduct of normal summer operations. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. 1.5 ACCESSIBILITY A. This project is subject to and the contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act. SUMMARY OF WORK CATechnical Specs10011sr101010M.doc Section 01010 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION C:\Technical Specs\0011sr\01010M.doc 0011 — SUMMARY OF WORK Section 01010 Page 2 ,m, Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Inspecting and testing B. Schedule of values C. Application for payment D. Change procedures 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions and options. 1.3 INSPECTING AND TESTING COSTS A. Costs Included in the Contract Sum: 1. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency. 2. Costs of testing services used by Contractor separate from Contract ,�. Document requirements. 3. Costs of re -testing upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect/Engineer. r-� 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will not be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values with list of subcontractors in duplicate within 7 days after date of receipt of Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance. D. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances, if any, specified in this section. ..R E. Include separately, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS Section 01019 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: Monthly D. Include forms required by Owner. 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 1987 Edition, Paragraph 7.4 by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710. B. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request Notice of Change that includes a detailed - description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a_statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. D. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect. E. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a directive, on AIA Form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. F. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. G. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. H. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the.Contract. 1.7 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS Section 01019 Page 2 P" Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION C:\Technical Specs\masterspec101019M.doc CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS Section 01019 Page 3 ... Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 01039 low COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to ., this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Pre -construction meeting. C. Site mobilization meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Preinstallation meetings. F. Examination. G. Preparation. H. Cutting and Patching. 1.., 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with �* building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. Verify installed system will be integrated and operational prior to use. .•, C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically in Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the .., construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures, and outlets with finish elements. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01039 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of activities. 1.3 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Confirm drawing dimensions and roof penetrations. 1.4 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. The Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Intent to Award. B. Attendance Required: Architect and Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, Products, values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. -- 6. Scheduling. D. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1.5 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. A. Attendance Required: Architect, Special Consultants, Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. B. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Procedures for testing. 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. C. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to participants, and those affected by decisions made. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01039 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS — NOT USED COORDINATION AND MEETINGS P-+ - Section 01039 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at ... meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Architect as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. ,,. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. PW 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre -installation meeting at the site two weeks prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. r Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to participants, and those affected by decisions made. PART 2 PRODUCTS — NOT USED COORDINATION AND MEETINGS P-+ - Section 01039 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in Product sections; match existing Products and work for patching and extending work. B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform alteration work. C. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. D. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring Products and finishes to original or specified condition. E. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified _ condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. F. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, provide a smooth and even transition. Patch Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. G. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit recommendation to Architect/Engineer for review. H. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition; to Architect for review. I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. J. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product sections. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces, especially floor slabs scheduled to receive new flooring, are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location prior to installing new work. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01039 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING K. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. L. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affect: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. M. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. N. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. O. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill. P. Restore Work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Q. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. R. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. S. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. T. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. END OF SECTION W 00W COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01039 Page 5 P"'" P•w Owl', r-� a-+ Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures B. Construction progress schedules C. Proposed Products list D. Product Data E. Shop Drawings F. Samples G. Design data H. Test reports I. Certificates J. Manufacturer's instructions K. Manufacturer's field reports L. Erection drawings 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranties, bonds, manufacturers' certificates, and closeout submittals. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a SUBMITTALS Section 01300 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect. Coordinate submission of related items. F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the contractor. G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. I. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 0.4 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data for Review: 1. Submitted to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. B. Product Data for Information: 1. Submitted for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator. C. Product Data for Project Close-out: 1. Submitted for the Owner's benefit during and after project completion. D. Submit the number of copies that the Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by the Architect. E. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. SUBMITTALS Section 01300 Page 2 0 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 F. Indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. G. After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article above and provide copies for record documents described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. 0.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings for Review: 1. Submitted to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. B. Shop Drawings for Information: 1. Submitted for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner. C. Shop Drawings for Project Close-out: 1. Submitted for the Owner's benefit during and after project completion. D. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. E. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and two opaque reproductions. 0.6 SAMPLES A. Samples For Review: 1. Submitted to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. B. Samples For Information: 1. Submitted for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator. C. Samples For Selection: 1. Submitted to Architect for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect selection. 3. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. SUBMITTALS Section 01300 Page 3 Fe Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 E. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. F. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. G. Reviewed samples that may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sections. H. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in the specification section. 0.7 DESIGN DATA A. Submit for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner. B. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 0.8 TEST REPORTS A. Submit for the Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner. B. Submit test reports for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 0.9 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or the Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 0.10 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect for delivery to owner in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. C. Refer to Section 01400 - Quality Control, Manufacturers' Field Services article. 0.11 ERECTION DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS Section 01300 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas A. Submit drawings for the Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for the Owner. 0011 B. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by the Architect or Owner. PART 1 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 2 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS Section 01300 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance - control of installation. B. Tolerances +*+ C. References. D. Inspecting and testing laboratory services. E. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of manufacturers' instructions and certificates. B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE - CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. .-, F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.4 TOLERANCES A. Monitor tolerance control of installed products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. QUALITY CONTROL Section 01400 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.5 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by code. C. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties in Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.6 INSPECTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Contractor will employ services of an independent firm to perform inspecting and testing. Contractor shall include said services as a part of his/her bid. B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification sections. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm directly to the Architect and Contractor, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. E. Testing or inspecting does not relieve Contractor to perform Work to contract requirements. F. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL Section 01400 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas SECTION 01500 0011 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL— Related ENERAL-Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. a, 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and ` sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, dust and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. 1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Cost: Contractor must verify and make all temporary connections. Do not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. Owner will pay cost of energy used for construction purposes. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Provide temporary power transformers, switchgear, wiring and other devices as required to support continuing operations. B. Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at the site. Do not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. C. Complement existing power service capacity and characteristics as required. D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required by the contractor's operations. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main service disconnect and over -current protection at convenient location feeder switch at source distribution equipment. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. Outlets damaged by contractors use shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 150 sq. ft. (46 sq. m) of active work area. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ,„ Section 01500 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 1.4 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/ sq ft. (21 watt/sq. m) but no less than that required by OSHA. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq. ft. (10.8 watt/ sq. m) lighting to exterior staging and T storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq. ft. (2.5 watt/sq. m) H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. _ E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.5 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Article 1.14 - Exterior Enclosures in this section. C. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. D. Maintain minimum ambient temperature 50° F (10° C) in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. Prevent transmission of dust, fumes, odors, vapors or gasses into the store operating areas. 1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. B. General contractor will pay for own service. 1.8 FACSIMILE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization. B. General contractor will pay for own service. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section 01500 Page 2 PWA Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures for the express use of contractor +°-ft personnel. Do not allow construction personnel to use new or existing Owner toilet facilities. 1.11 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.12 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 1.13 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self- closing hardware and locks. OMNI 1.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and existing work to remain and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. Failure to take reasonable protective measures shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Damages resulting from improper care shall be corrected by the contractor at no cost to the Owner. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. Pool CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section 01500 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.15 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.16 DUST CONTROL A. Provide dust control dampening of exposed topsoil at intervals of not less than once each week. Additional dampening shall be performed when EPA limits for airborne dust particles are exceeded, or if dust levels impact store operations. B. Discontinue dust control when paving and landscape materials are in place. 1.17 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off-site. E. Open free -fall chutes not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.18 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Application for Payment inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 ft. (600 mm). Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. _. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. E. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section 01500 Page 4 '� Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 PART PRODUCTS Not Used r PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION rW r-, CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ,,., Section 01500 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products B. Transportation and handling C. Storage and protection D. Product options E. Substitutions 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS •- A. Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures. B. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring. 1.3 PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically ,�. permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture, for components being replaced. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. Immediately remove from site any products that do not conform to the contract documents. r C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures. r C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. D. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or pwk protection. E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT e� Section 01600 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 condensation or potential degradation of product. F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The general provision of the contract specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period to requirements specified in this section. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT _ Section 01600 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL - r. Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. s - C. Project record documents. D. Operation and maintenance data. E. Warranties. F. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning. 1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready ,., for Architect's review. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. D. Owner will occupy all portions of the building as specified in Section 01010. 1.4 FINAL CLEANING °^ A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign ,+ substances. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. D. Clean site; sweep paved areas. r-� E. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01700 Page I Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 1.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD_ DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual _ Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each applicable item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. G. Remove Architect title block and professional seal from all documents. H. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data bound in 8-112 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "ROOF MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, typed on 24 pound white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01700 Page 2 0 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major material suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a) Significant design criteria. b) List of equipment. c) Parts list for each component. d) Operating instructions. e) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f) Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a) Shop drawings and product data. b) Air and water balance reports. c) Certificates. d) Photocopies of warranties and bonds. E. Submit 1 draft copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. F. Submit two sets of revised final volumes, within 10 days after final inspection. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three "D" side ring binder with durable plastic cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01700 Page 3 LQ Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301-89 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 304R-89 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 3. ACI 311-81 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 4. ACI 318-89 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 5. ACI 347R-88 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 6. MSP -1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect. C. Design and Testing: 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the �** Architect. 2. Job site cylinders shall be taken by the testing laboratory. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. 3. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory approved by the Architect. 4. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Contractor. 5. Test results shall be furnished to the Owner and the Architect with copies to the Contractor. 6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the under strength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by the Architect. D. Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at Contractor's expense a testing laboratory r*s CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 acceptable to the Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect, at any time during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests, including the retesting of the rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, chemical floor hardeners, and others as requested by the Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315-88 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structure" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood - faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good as new". B. Use plywood complying with US Product Standard PS -1 "B -B (Concrete Form) Plywood: Class 1, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable materials. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. D. Corrugated Steel Forms: Shall be formed from galvanized sheets of gauge and properties as shown on the drawings. E. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are shown on the Drawings." 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615-90, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185-90A, welded steel wire fabric. C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675M - 90a, Grade 80 or ASTM A 499-89. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas D. Supports for Reinforcement: 0011 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. 3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with �., forms, provide supports with legs which are hot/dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless steel protected. Pon, 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150-89, Type 1, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Fine Aggregate: „^ 1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. ,.. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33-90. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. '^ 3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: ,., a. Not larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. D. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. ., E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260-86. F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494-90, Type A, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. G. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494-90, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. Polk 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. H. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Architect. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 3 P. Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded can fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 112"" thickness by depth of slab. B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections. C. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 1 kg of fluosilicate per gal. D. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. E. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171 R-86. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. F. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309-91, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to the Architect. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. 1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192-90a and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 39-86, specified in ACI 301-89. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio ( or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve. 2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301-89. Strength date for established standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. 3. If standard deviation exceeds 4137 kPa or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 8274 kPa greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. 4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214-89 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 4 0 r M Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete will the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28 day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air - entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained). 2. See Section 02514 for additional requirements for concrete mix design for sitework concrete. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50° F. C. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 1. 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate D. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.7 SLUMP LIMITS A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3". 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2" - 3" slump concrete. 4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4". 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirement of ASTM C 94-90, and as herein specified. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for materials with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94-90 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85° F. and 90° F. reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90° F. reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in- r place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where striping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap off metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. H. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1 1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surfaces. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt and other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 6 La Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 3" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. F. Install welded wire fabric in a long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the '^ Architect. 2. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms having keyway as detailed on the Drawings. C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items - to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 7 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304-R89, and as herein specified. 2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this type of concrete. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 3. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 4. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork — installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 8 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 E. Cold Weather Placing: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which should be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40° F. uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50° F, and not more than 80° F, at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and .. strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305R-89 and as herein specified. .� 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90° F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. , 3.7 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHED A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high .� spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform smooth, granular texture. B. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating systema 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plan tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 9 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 — C. Non -Slip Broom Finish: 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and — elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. 3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50° F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon a final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 10 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final sure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified 0011 above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.9 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50° F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.10 RE -USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged from facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contract form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to the Architect. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms. but only when acceptable to the Architect. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 11 9 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas Q Cf 0011 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patch with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. 3. For exposed to view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, adversely affect the durability of the remove and replace the concrete. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: where possible, that contain defects that concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non- reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Architect. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4: clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry - pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 12 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep ,,. patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by the Architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of the Architect. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172-90, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94-90. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143-90a; one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 173-78, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40° F. and below, and .., when 80° F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31-90; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. • 6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39-86; one set for each 76 cubic meters or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 465d square meters of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a "^ given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 38 cubic ^* meters, the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. C. When the strength of field cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion �* laboratory cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect and the Contractor on the same �.. day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28 day test. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 13 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 — been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with _ ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 14 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar and grout for masonry. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 08115 - Custom Steel Frames: Grouting steel doorframes. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. A B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement. D. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. E. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. e F. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. G. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. H. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. I. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. J. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. K. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced _ Unit Masonry. L. ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. M. ASTM C1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength. N. ASTM C1142 - Ready -Mixed Mortar for Unit Masonry. O. ASTM E447 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. imp P. ASTM E518 - Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry. MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT Section 04100 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270. B. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C1019. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40° F (5° C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90° F (32° C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404. E. Grout Fine Aggregate: sand. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. - Bonding Agent: Latex type. 2.2 MORTAR MIXES A. Ready Mixed Mortar: ASTM C1142, Type RS. B. Mortar For Load Bearing and / or Reinforced Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S (1800 psi) using the Property Specification. Use Type S for all walls having vertical reinforcing and MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT Section 04100 Page 2 oft MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT Section 04100 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 grouted cells. C. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type N (750 psi) using the Property Specification. D. Other mortar types shall not be used in the work. 2.3 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. D. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. E. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing. F. Use mortar within two hours after mixing. 2.4 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi (21 MPa) strength at 28 days; 100-150 mm slump; premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94. 2.5 GROUT MIXING A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. C. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 2.6 MIX TESTS A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section 01400. B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. B. Plug clean-out holes with block masonry units. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT Section 04100 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with ASTM C270. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than two CMU courses. D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. END OF SECTION MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT Section 04100 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL— Related ENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by ,., inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items. B. Shop fabricated aluminum items. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. B. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. ^' C. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. D. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. E. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. F. ANSI A14.3 - Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements. G. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. H. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. I. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. �• J. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. K. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars. METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05500 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 L. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. M. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. N. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. O. ASTM B26 - Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings. P. ASTM B85 - Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings. Q. ASTM B177 - Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use. R. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. S. ASTM 8210 - Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes. T. ASTM B211 - Aluminum -Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire. U. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. V. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. W. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. -� X. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 -Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. _ C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer ^. experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. A. Welders Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01300, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05500 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Plates: ASTM A283. D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A32 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized E. components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. H. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20 Type I Inorganic zinc rich. 2.2 MATERIALS -ALUMINUM A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T5. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209. C. Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. D. Aluminum -Alloy Bars: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. E. Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings: ASTM 626. F. Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings: ASTM 685. - G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Steel, galvanized to ASTM A153. H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. `P" B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal jointed members by intermittent welds and plastic filler. .. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal measurements. METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05500 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 —. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches (3 mm in 1 200 mm). E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches (1.5 mm in 1 200 mm). 2.5 FINISHES - STEEL A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items with one coat. D. Chrome Plating: ASTM B177, nickel -chromium alloy, satin finish. 2.6 FINISHES - ALUMINUM A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 603.8 B. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA A41 anodized, prepared with a mechanical M pre- treatment, anodized to clear color. C. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA A41 anodized, prepared with a mechanical M pre- treatment, anodized to clear color. D. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05500 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. Provide anchors, required for connecting railings to structure. Anchor railing to structure. C. Field weld anchors as indicated on shop drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds smooth. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non -cumulative. r, B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 114 inch (6 mm) • C. Maximum Out -of -Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm) END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05500 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART 1 GENERAL— Related ENERAL—Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof curbs. h ; B. Blocking in wall and roof openings. „ C. Wood furring and grounds. �- D. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets and wood trim. r�+ E. Preservative treatment of wood. .. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 0531 -Steel Roof Deck: Metal roof decking to receive wood curbs. "^ 1.3 REFERENCES A. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards. B. APA: American Plywood Association. C. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C1 - All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. E. NFPA: National Forest Products Association. F. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. G. SPIB: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. ' H. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. I. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING Section 06114 Page 1 .., Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 0011 A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: RIS, SPIB, and WWPA. B. Miscellaneous Framing: West Coast Douglas Fir species, 15 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat. C. Plywood: APA, Grade BC; Exposure Durability 1; sanded. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot -dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel. 2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Exterior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): colored, type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMING A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up. C. Construct curb members of single pieces. D. Space framing and furring 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. E. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. F. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, roofing vapor retardant, and parapet construction. WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING Section 06114 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 3.2 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious ** materials, roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site -sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Dimension Lumber: �^* 1. General: Where wood framing from 2" through 4" in nominal thickness is indicated, provide lumber complying with lumber producer's inspection agency grading rules certified as conforming to the "National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber" by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC). 2. Dress dimension lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide kiln -dried dimension lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at time of dressing and complying with KD size requirements of PS 20. Mark lumber "KD". 4. Boards: ` Southern pine: B & BTR Grade, S4S, Kiln Dried. West Coast Douglas Fir: C Select Grade, S4S, Kiln Dried. California Redwood: A Grade, S4S, Kiln Dried. Rough sawn where noted or exposed to view. 5. Grounds and Nailers: �., Yellow Pine, No. 1 Grade, Kiln Dried. B Plywood: 1. Exterior: a. Not exposed: APA, EXT, B -C, Group 1, of thickness noted on the drawings. b. Exposed to view: APA, EXT, A -C, Group 1, of thickness noted. 2. Interior: .� a. Not Exposed: APA, INT, B -D, Group 1. b. One Side Exposed: APA, INT, A -D, Group 1. C. Both Sides Exposed: APA, INT, A -A, Group 1. END OF SECTION e - P WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING Section 06114 Page 3 No Text Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL— Related ENERAL—Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and joint backing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast in Place Concrete: Sealants required in conjunction with cast -in- place concrete. B. Section 08115 - Custom Steel Frames: Sealants required in conjunction with door frames. C. Section 08410 — Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants required in conjunction with glazing methods. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C790 -.Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. B. ASTM C804 Use of Solvent -Release Type Sealants. C. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. D. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. G. ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open -Cell Foam). POW H. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification: 1.4 SUBMITTALS . A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. OWR B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance - criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. r-* JOINT SEALERS Section 07900 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 C. Samples: Submit two samples, illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. ^ B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. C. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by manufacturer. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01040. B. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Sonneborne Division of Contec B. Pecora Chemical Corp C. Tremco Mfg. Co. D. Bostik _- 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS: A. PRODUCTS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following for sealing exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces of concrete and masonry; between concrete masonry and stone; between metal and concrete, mortar, masonry, or stone; interior and exterior perimeter joints of metal frames in exterior walls; and exterior JOINT SEALERS Section 07900 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 overhead joints. ., 1. MULTI -PART NONSAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT: Type M; Grade NS; class 25; Shore 'A' hardness of minimum 15, maximum 50. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 500". b. Pecora "Dynatrol II". C. Sonneborn "Sonolastic NP 2". d. Tremco "Dymeric". OR ,. 2. ONE -PART NONSAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT: Type S; Grade NS; class 25; Shore 'A' hardness of minimum 15, maximum 50. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 900". b. Pecora "Dynatrol I". C. Sonneborn "Sonolastic NP V. d. Tremco "Dymonic". B. PRODUCTS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following for sealing exterior and interior joints in horizontal surfaces of concrete; between metal and concrete, mortar, stone, masonry and pavers. 1. MULTI -PART POURABLE POLYURETHANE SEALANT: Type M; Grade P; class 25; Shore 'A' hardness of minimum 15, maximum 50. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 550". b. Momeco Wulken 255". C. Tremco "THC -900". 2. ONE -PART POURABLE POLYURETHANE SEALANT: Type S; Grade P; class 25; Shore 'A' hardness of minimum 15, maximum 50. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 950". b. Pecora "Urexpan NR 201". C. Sonneborn "Sonolastic SL 1 ". C. PRODUCTS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following for sealing interior joints in field -painted vertical and overhead surfaces at perimeter of door frames, gypsum drywall, plaster and concrete or masonry; and all other interior locations not indicated otherwise. 1. ACRYLIC -EMULSION SEALANT: Single -component, air curing; conforming to ASTM C835-76; nonstaining, nonbleeding. a. Bostik "Chem -Calk 600". b. Pecora "AC 20". C. Sonneborn "Sonolac". d. Tremco "Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk". D. COLOR: To match adjacent surfaces. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. JOINT SEALERS Section 07900 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 JOINT SEALERS Section 07900 Page 4 D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. — B. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS Section 07900 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 SECTION 08115 CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL— Related ENERAL—Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES Section 08115 Page 1 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated steel frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04100 -Mortar: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. D. Section 08800 - Glazing. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of frames. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated. D. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. F. HMMA 802 - Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. a.. G. HMMA 820 -,Hollow Metal Frames. H. HMMA 830 - Hardware Preparation and Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. I. HMMA 840 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. J. HMMA 850 - Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. K. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. L. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. M. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES Section 08115 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 -- 1.4 SUBMITTALS CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES Section 08115 Page 2 A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, and finish. C. Product Data: Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of cut- outs for hardware, reinforcement. _ D. Samples: Submit two sample of frame,6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) in size illustrating factory finished frame colors and surface texture. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of HMMA 802, HMMA 820, HMMA 830, HMMA 840, HMMA 850, and ANSI A117.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect frames with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. C. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01400. B. Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation. CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES Section 08115 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center "y Lubbock, Texas 0011 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMES A. Steel: Galvanized sheet in accordance with ASTM A525, G60. B. Interior Frames: 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick material, core thickness. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole. B. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion. D. Primer: Zinc chromate. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames to HMMA 802 and 820, style and configuration to suit doors specified in Section 08114. a.. B. Fabricate frames as welded unit. C. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. D. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches (1 200 mm) with roll formed steel channels fitted .�, tightly into frame head, flush with top. E. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. F. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 2 inch (50 mm) head member. 2.4 FINISH A. Primer: Baked. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION e-� A. Install frames in accordance with HMMA 840 DHI for hardware installation. B. Coordinate with masonry wallboard and tilt -up wall construction for anchor placement. CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES Section 08115 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. _. D. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710 and doors in Section 08211. E. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1116 inch (1.5 mm) measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner. END OF SECTION CUSTOM STEEL FRAMES Section 08115 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; non -rated. s*, -. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08115 - Custom Steel Frames: Steel door frames. B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing. D. Section 09900 -Painting: Site finishing doors. E. Section 15840 - Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers: Metal louvers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. ,r B. ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. C. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. """ D. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. AWI - Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. Polk F. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. G. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. H. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. I. Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, identify cutouts for glazing and louvers. C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and FLUSH WOOD DOORS Section 08211 Page 1 r Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 characteristics; factory machining criteria, and factory finishing criteria. D. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) in size cut from top corner of door. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer,6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen, pattern and color. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1300, Premium Grade. B. Finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1500, grades identified in schedule. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01400. — B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01720 to the following term: — 1. Life of Installation: Interior doors. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Weyerhaeuser Product Timblend Core Type DPC-1. — B. Eggers Hardwood Products Corp. Product Master Flush. C. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Product Novador. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01400. FLUSH WOOD DOORS Section 08211 Page 2 .M FLUSH WOOD DOORS Section 08211 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 2.2 DOOR TYPES A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick; solid core construction as indicated. 2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Core (Solid, Non -Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type PC -Particleboard 2.4 FLUSH DOOR FACING Pat B. Veneer Facing (Flush Interior Doors): AWI Premium quality Red Oak wood, rotary cut, with matched grain, for transparent finish. 2.5 ADHESIVE A. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. C. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Of same species as veneer facing Hardwood for transparent finish. D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. Bond edge banding to cores. F. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. G. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. 2.7 FINISH A. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. PART 3 EXECUTION a, 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION O A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .M FLUSH WOOD DOORS Section 08211 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. Use threaded through bolts for half surface hinges. E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08114 and hardware specified in Section 08710. G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. H. Install door louvers, plumb and level. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch (3 mm) measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 118 inch (3 mm) measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch (3 mm) measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS Section 08211 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum Storefront Type 1 (4.5" x 2") for .25"-1" glass with medium style aluminum doors. a-, 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Metal fabricated attachment devices. B. Section 07900 - Sealants: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Cylinders D. Section 08721 - Automatic Door Equipment. E. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. C. AAMA 501 - Methods of Test for Metal Curtain Walls. D. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. E. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. F. AAMA 606.1'- Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. G. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. H. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. I. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. J. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped. K. ANSI/ASTM A36 - Structural Steel L. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. M. ANSI/ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center 0011 -- Lubbock, Texas N. ANSI/ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. O. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. P. ANSI/ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. Q. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. R. ANSI/ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. S. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION — STOREFRONT TYPE I A. Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections, shop fabricated, factory pre -finished, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. B. Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass; with full recovery of glazing materials. C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing. D. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq ft (0.0003 cu m/s/sq m) of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E283. E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 2.86 Ibf/sq ft (136.85 N/sq m). F. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. G. System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F (95 degrees C) over a 12 hour period without T causing detrimental affect to system components. H. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work and expansion and contraction joint location and details. C. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, and internal drainage details. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 D. Submit two samples 2 x 2 inches (50 x 50 mm) in size illustrating pre -finished aluminum surface, and glazing materials. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual B. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years documented experience. 1.9 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01400. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Handle work of this section in accordance with AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10. C. Protect pre -finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) during and 48 hours after installation. 1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01400. B. Coordinate the Work with installation of adjacent components or materials. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Provide three year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified r requirements. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Type I: EFCO S-402 (4.25" x 2") for .25" and 1" glazing. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent Products. 1. Armarlite 1. Kawneer 2. United States Aluminum C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01400. 2.2 MATERIALS — STOREFRONT TYPE II/ RIBBON 0011 A. Aluminum 1. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T5. or T6 alloy and temper. B. Glass — See Section 08800. C. Dissimilar Metals 1. All dissimilar metals must be properly insulated to prevent galvanic action. D. Fasteners 1. All exposed fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel is properly isolated from the aluminum. E. Thermal Barrier 1. Barrier material shall be poured -in-place two part polyurethane. A nonstructural thermal barrier is unacceptable. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPS 20, zinc rich type. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Frame: 2 x 4.5 inch (50 x 125 mm) nominal dimension; flush glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system. Frames for interior glazing need not to be thermally broken. B. Doors: 3.5 inches (89 mm) thick, 3.5 inch (89 mm) wide top rail, 3.5 inch (89 mm) wide vertical stiles, 6.5 inch (165 mm) wide bottom rail; beveled glazing stops. 2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 of types shown on the drawings. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Aft Lubbock,Texas 0011 2.6 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900. 2.7 DOORS A. General 1. Major portions of the door section shall have .188" wall thickness. Glazing stop sections shall have .050" wall thickness. B. Entrance Doors Swing Type 2. Entrance Doors Door stiles shall be no less than 3.5 " width. 3. Door stiles and rails shall have hairline joints at corners. Heavy concealed reinforcement brackets shall be secured with screws and shall be deep penetration and fillet welded. 4. All doors shall have an adjusting mechanism in the top rail to provide for minor rh clearance adjustments. 5. Weather-stripping shall be wool pile and shall be installed in one stile of pairs and in jamb stiles of center pivoted doors. C. Door stops shall include pile weather-stripping. D. Glazing: All units shall be dry glazed with extruded pressure fitting aluminum glazing stops, and EPDM gasket. 2.8 DOOR HARDWARE A. Weather Stripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable. B. Hinges: 1.5 pair 4.5 x 4 (114 x 101 mm) ball bearing butt hinges. C. Push/Pull: Manufacturers Standard Ulfraline 1"diameter stainless steel. D. Closer: Norton 1605 without Hold Open. E. Dead latch: Adams -Rite MS1850. F. Cylinder Lock: Specified in Section 08710. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware and door operator hinge hardware. F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 R 2.10 FINISHES A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 603.8 AAMA 605.2 AAMA 606.1 AAMA 607.1 AAMA 608.1. B. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Anodized to clear color, to 0.0007 inch (0.018 mm) thickness. C. Concealed Steel Items: Primed with iron oxide paint. D. Apply 2 coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.._ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. B. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. G. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. H. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. I. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08710 and 08721 for installation requirements. J. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. K. Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non -cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft (1.5 mm/3 m), whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 6 r�+ Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. C. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Protect finished Work from damage. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08410 Page 7 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 08460 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL — "'"" Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SUMMARY A. WORK INCLUDED`. Furnish complete automatic aluminum door system, as specified, that has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 05500 — Metal Fabrications B. Section 08410 —Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts C. Section 16050 through 16511 — Electrical 1.3 REFERENCES A. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 1. AAMA 101: Appendix Dissimilar Materials B. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF AUTOMATIC DOOR MANUFACTURERS (AAADM) C. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE: 1. ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Methods of Test. 2. ANSI Al 56.10: For Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Swing Doors section. D. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS: 1. ASTM B221: Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes and Tubes. E. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION: 1. NFPA 101: Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings & Structures. F. THE ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION: 1. AA Aluminum Finishes Manual. G. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY, INC.: 1. UL 325: Electrical Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems H. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY OF CANADA (ULC) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide in conformance with Section 01700. 1. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's complete product and installation data. AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DEVICES Section 08460 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 2. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit drawings showing layout, profiles, product components including anchorage, accessories, finish and glazing details (where required). 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: Submit the following: a. Manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Warranty document as specified herein. c. AAADM inspection compliance form completed and signed by certified AAADM inspector prior to doors being placed in operation as proof of compliance with ANSI Al 56.10. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS: Installer experienced (as determined by contractor) to perform work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product manufacturer. B. MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Manufacturer to have minimum (5) five years successful experience in the fabrication of automatic doors of the type required for this project. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during installation, approving acceptable installer and approving application method. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY: Units to be warranted against defect in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights owner may have under Contract Documents. B. DISTRIBUTOR'S WARRANTY: One year warranty - labor and transportation charges for defective parts replacement. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions/openings by field measurements before fabrication and record on shop drawings. Coordinate with fabrication and construction schedule to avoid construction delays. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. ORDERING AND DELIVERY: Comply with factory's ordering instructions and lead time requirements. Delivery shall be in factory's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. STORAGE AND PROTECTION: Provide protection from exposure to harmful weather conditions and vandalism. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Automatic swing door operator(s) furnished and installed shall be of type(s) and size(s) specified and as indicated on plans and door schedule. Automatic swing door operator(s) AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DEVICES Section 08460 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 to be manufactured by Horton Automatics, a division of Overhead Door Corporation or of the following: 1. Stanley 2. Besam 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. MANUFACTURED DOOR UNITS: 1. Type 4100: Surface Applied Operator with Connecting Arms: The operator header shall be mounted to the surface of the door frame. Connecting hardware shall be a double arm arrangement that can either push the door or pull the door open to suit the job condition. B. OPERATOR: The Electric Operating Mechanism shall be Series 4000: operator shall be shock mounted and concealed in an extruded aluminum case 6" x 6" (152 mm x 152 mm) side access header cover. The operator shall be readily convertible to any hand required. Opening force shall be accomplished by a 1/8 HP D.C. permanent magnet motor working through reduction gears to the output shaft. Gear train bearings shall be sealed ball bearing types. Closing force shall be supplied by a field replaceable QuadracoilTM spring .. (four independent coil springs separated by teflon discs and enclosed in an external spring box). Close speed control shall be accomplished by dynamic braking of the motor and shall be fully adjustable. Operator to act as a manual closer when power is off or when the master control unit is removed. An On/Off toggle switch shall be supplied. The master control unit shall incorporate an adjustable time delay of 1 to 28 seconds. It shall provide infinite adjustment to opening and back check speeds including adjusting the opening force without affecting the opening speed. The master control unit shall provide for immediate reversal of door motion without undue strain on the drive train by supplying stepped voltage to the motor. The door shall reverse when closing if an object stops the door. A locked door motor protection circuit will be supplied that will shut off current to the motor if it is applied when the door is inadvertently locked or otherwise prevented from opening. 2.3 RELATED EQUIPMENT - A. BASIC SENSOR SYSTEM - 24 VAC, class II circuit: Vista TM package: 1. Motion sensor: Microwave un-idirectional/bi-directional sensor shall activate the door to �^^ traffic in both directions. 2. Swing Side safety sensor: Active infrared sensor shall utilize a combination of focused and diffused technology. Sensor shall keep a closed door from opening or an open door from closing when safety zone (swing door area) is occupied. When door is in open position the swing side safety sensor shall provide threshold protection covering the full width of door overlapping into activating zone. 2.4 RELATED WORK REQUIREMENTS A. ELECTRICAL: 120 VAC, 60 cycle, 1 phase, 15 amp. Non -North American voltages can be 240 VAC (operator must have 240 volt power supply) AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DEVICES Section 08460 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 2.5 MATERIALS, FINISHES AND FABRICATION A. EXTRUDED ALUMINUM: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy and temper, anodized: 1. Structural Header Sections: Minimum 1/8" (3 mm) thickness. 2. Structural Frame Sections: Minimum 1/8" (3 mm) thickness. 3. Structural Panel Sections: Commercial grade. B. FINISHES (for all exposed aluminum surfaces): Shall be the following: 1. 204-R1 Clear: Arch. Class II Clear Anodized Coating, AA-M12C22A31. C. OPERATOR CONSTRUCTION: Electromechanical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Installer must verify that base conditions previously installed under other sections are acceptable for product installation according to with manufacturer's instructions. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Do not start work until all negative conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer and manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Install door operator units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash with manufacturer's prescribed tolerances. Provide support and anchor in place. B. DISSIMILAR MATERIALS: Comply with AAMA 101, Appendix Dissimilar Materials by separating aluminum materials and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points. C. WEATHER -TIGHT CONSTRUCTION: Install header and framing members in a bed of sealant or with joint filler or gaskets. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of construction. D. ELECTRICAL: General or electrical contractor to install all wiring to operator on a separate circuit breaker routed into header. 3.3 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. CLEANING: After installation, installer to take following steps: 1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. 2. Remove construction debris from construction site and legally dispose of debris. 3. Repair or replace damaged installed products. 4. Clean product surfaces and lubricate operating equipment for optimum condition and safety. B. ADJUSTMENT: Installer to adjust operator and controls for optimum condition and safety. C. ADVISE CONTRACTOR: of precautions required through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at the time of acceptance. END OF SECTION AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DEVICES Section 08460 Page 4 _, Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL — Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES s A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel and aluminum doors. B. Thresholds. C. Weather-stripping, seals and door gaskets. r N 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 08211 — Flush Wood Doors. B. Section 08115 - Custom Steel Frames. C. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders. D. Section 10430 - Signage. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Challenged People. B. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute - Quality Standards. D. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. E. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. F. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. G. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Review approved Shop Drawings of related trades and verify that scheduled finish hardware is suitable for each related item of work. Deliver templates and finish hardware to aluminum and glass door suppliers for fitting and installation. B. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.Schedules: Submit detailed finish hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01300, for Architect's approval. Schedule shall be complete, including type, manufacturer's name and number, and finish of each item required. A complete schedule of keying shall also be furnished. Do not order or deliver finish hardware until Architect has approved schedules. C:1Technical Specs10011sr108710M.doc DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 — C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. E. Samples: Submit 1 sample of each item scheduled illustrating style, color, and finish. F. Samples: Approved Samples may be incorporated into the Work. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's data on each item of hardware, including maintenance and installation instructions. Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. H. Templates: Furnish templates to other trades as required for fabrication of hollow metal door and frames, aluminum and glass doors, or other items related to hardware. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform all work required to complete the Finish Hardware installation indicated by the Contract Documents. Furnish all supplementary items necessary for proper installation and in accordance with the following requirements: 1. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. NFPA 101. 3. NFPA 80. 4. NFPA 252. B. Elimination of Architectural Barriers: Door hardware shall comply with the applicable requirements of The Americans with Disabilities Act. 1. Door hardware: Handles, knobs, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible doors shall be mounted no higher than 48" (1219 mm) above the floor or ground surface and shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or severe twisting to operate. The force required to activate door hardware shall be no greater than five Ibf. Preferred designs include but are not limited to lever -operated mechanisms, push - type mechanisms, and U-shaped handles. When sliding doors are fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. Doors to hazardous areas such as loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, and to other areas that might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made identifiable to the touch by a textured surface on the door handle, knob, pull or other operating hardware. This textured surface may be made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to the contact surface. Such textured surfaces shall not be provided for emergency exit doors or any doors DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 2 C:1Technical Specs10011sr108710M.doc Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 other than those to hazardous areas. 2. Door Closers: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three seconds to move to an open position of approximately 12 degrees. 3. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door comply with this paragraph. For hinged doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door opener or 30" (750 mm) from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For sliding or folding doors, the force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull latch. Forces shall be as follows: a. Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 8.5 Ibf. Slight increases in opening force shall be allowed where 8.5 Ibf is _insufficient to, compensate for air pressure differentials. b. Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors shall not require a force exceeding five Ibf. 4. Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force allowed by the governing authority or applicable building code. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying institutional door hardware with 3 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. C. Hardware Supplier Personnel:. Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this section. Installer shall show evidence of five years experience in the installation of grade 2 hardware. Provide a list of projects completed within the last two years with, at least three references. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. Include necessary instructions, templates, drawings and fasteners for proper installation. Include extra fasteners. C. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 3 C:1Technical Specs10011sr108710M.doc Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 — D. Coordinate hardware with other work. Review approved Shop Drawings of related trades and verify that scheduled finish hardware is suitable for each related item of work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01040. Review approved Shop Drawings of related trades and verify that scheduled finish hardware is suitable for each related item of work. B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. Deliver templates and finish hardware to aluminum and glass door suppliers for fitting and installation. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for door closers. 1.13 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 01700. B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide ten extra key lock cylinders for each keyed group. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: a. Hager Hinge Co. b. McKinney Products Co. 2. Cylinders and Locks: a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co. b. No Substitutions. 3. Exit/Panic Devices: DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 4 C:1Technical Specs10011sr108710M.doc Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co. b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. C. Sargent Manufacturing Co. d. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. 4. Push/Pull Units: a. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security, Inc. b. HB Ives, A Harrow Co. C. Traingle Brass Manufacturing Co. (Trimco) 5. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates: a. HB Ives, A Harrow Co. b. Traingle Brass Manufacturing Co. (Trimco) -- 6. Door Stripping and Seals: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. d. Zero International, Inc. 7. Thresholds: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. d. Zero International, Inc. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE: A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2.3 GENERAL A. Manufacturers Reference Numbers: Where items of hardware are specified by numbers of manufacturers, they are taken from the following catalogues: Russwin Sargent Corbin Schlage Stanley Hager Von Duprin Trimco LCN Ives Trego Glynn Johnson Corporation And those noted B. Only items listed as equal will be accepted by the Architect. DOOR HARDWARE - Section 08710 Page 5 C:1Technical Specs10011sr108710M.doc Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 C. Hinges- Shall be Stanley/Hager - in type, size and weight listed in the hardware sets. Comparisons of either McKinney or Hager/Stanley will be accepted as equal. Item Specified Mfr. Allowable Equals Item Mfr. Item Mfr, Butts: FBB168 Stanley BB1168 HagerT4B3786 McKinney FBB179 Stanley BB1279 HagerTB2714 McKinney F179 Stanley 1279 HagerT2714 McKinney FBB212 Stanley BB759 Hager TB792 McKinney 2060 Stanley 1250 Hager 1502 McKinney Butts: BB1168 Hager FBB168 Stanley T4133786 McKinney BB1279 Hager FBB179 Stanley TB2714 McKinney 1279 Hager F179 Stanley T2714 McKinney BB759 Hager FBB212 Stanley TB792 McKinney 1250 Hager 2060 Stanley 1502 McKinney Note: Where existing frames occur, it shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier to field measure hinge size and weight and to furnish hinges as required at these openings. G. Door Closers - Shall be types and series as shown in the hardware sets. H. All flush bolts shall have dust proof strikes. I. Push, Pulls, Kickplates, Door Stops & Bumpers - Shall be Trimco. Items of Baldwin, Brookline and Trego are acceptable as equal. Thickness of kickplates shall be 16 gauge .050. J. Silencers - Shall be Glynn -Johnson GJ -64. Provide three (3) silencers for interior single doors and two (2) silencers for interior pairs of doors. K. Hand of Door: The drawings show the swing hand of each door leaf (left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing as shown. L. Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. N. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. O. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard -manufacturer units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 6 C:ITechnical Specs10011sr108710M.doc Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 2.4 HARDWARE: A. Shall be ANSI 156.2 Series 4000 Grade 1 for extra heavy duty industrial use. See Attached Schedule 2.5 KEYING A. Door Locks: Master keyed Include control keying with removable core cylinders. B. Supply keys in the following quantities: 1. All locks shall be master keyed with existing master key system. 2. Furnish 6 master keys direct to Owner. 3. Exterior locks shall have construction cylinders, construction master keyed. Furnish ten (10) keys. Keys shall have key code stamped on bow of key. 4. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock. 5. Hardware supplier shall consult with Architect and secure written approval of the complete keying layout prior to placing lock order with factory. 6. After installation of all hardware and before acceptance of the building, hardware supplier shall check each locked door against key code index to make certain that correct locks and cylinders are on proper doors. On any incorrectly located cylinder, he shall tag and have general contractor relocate to proper position. 7. Hardware Schedule: (See Attached) 2.6 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: 1. 24 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 2.7 FINISHES �^^+ A. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01040. B. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Location for Builders' Hardware" by BHMA, except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by the Architect. C. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. D. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. E. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's required to install "R" - hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install r* surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. F. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 7 C:1Technical Specs10011sr108710M.doc Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 G. Drill and countersink units that are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. 3.2 FINAL ADJUSTMENT: A. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and re -lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. Adjust hardware for smooth operation under provisions of Section 01700. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. Furnish each door leaf with hardware items scheduled. If a door is shown on the Drawings and not included in hardware schedule then Contractor shall provide comparable hardware as doors at similar locations or functions, at no additional cost. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General : Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. 1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. 2. All hardware finish shall be BHMA 612. 3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HEADING #1 Pr. Drs. #1, 2, 3, 4 each pair to have 2 Cylinders Match existing keying system Balance of hardware by door supplier HEADING #2 C:1Technical Specs10011sr108710M.doc DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 8 END OF SECTION CATechnical Specs10011sr108710M.doc 0011 DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 9 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas Single. Dr. #5, 6 each to have 1.5 pr. Hinges 6131279 4.5 x 4.5 Hager 1 Push Plate 30S Hager 1 Pull Plate 35N Hager 1 Closer DC3210 M54 689 Corbin 1 Kickplate 190S 10" x DW -2" Hager 1 Wall stop 236W Hager 3 Silencers Hager Finish to match existing END OF SECTION CATechnical Specs10011sr108710M.doc 0011 DOOR HARDWARE Section 08710 Page 9 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 08800 ,,.. GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL— Related ENERAL—Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass and glazing for hollow metal work, windows, doors, and aluminum frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .. K. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. L. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. GLAZING W Section 08800 Page 1 A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. B. Section 08114 - Custom Steel Doors: Glazed doors. C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors. D. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. E. Section 10800 -Toilet and Bath Accessories: Mirrors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. B. ASTM C669 - Glazing Compounds for Back Bedding and Face Glazing of Metal Sash. C. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent -Release Type Sealants. D. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. G. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass- Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. ... H. ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architectural Safety Glass. I. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. ASTM E283 - Test Method For Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. .. K. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. L. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. GLAZING W Section 08800 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 M. ASTM E576 - Test Method For Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical Position. N. ASTM E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. O. ASTM E774 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units. P. FGMA - Glazing Manual. Q. FGMA - Sealant Manual. R. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual. S. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity, of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07191 and 07900. 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier and vapor retarder seal. 3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with Uniform Building Code. C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 -Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) in size, exampling glass units, coloration and design. _ E. Samples: Submit 6 inch (150 mm) long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 -Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Certificates: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed insulated glass, meets or exceeds specified requirements. GLAZING Section 08800 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods Maintain one copy on site. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with P minimum five years documented experience.. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Section 01400 - Coordination and Meetings: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees r C) -- C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. PART2 PRODUCTS o 2.1 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. PPG 2. ASG a 3. LOF 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01400. B. Float Glass (Type FG -A): ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; 6 mm minimum thick. C. Safety Glass (Type FG -B): Clear; fully tempered conforming to ANSI Z97.1;6 mm thick. GLAZING Section 08800 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 2.2 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Pecora 2. Trimco 3. Master Putty 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01400. B. Silicone Sealant (Type GC -F): ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non -staining, cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25 ; color as selected. 2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Pecora 2. Trimco 3. Master Putty 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01400. B. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864 Option 1, Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. C. Spacer Shims: ASTM C864 Option1 Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application. D. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color, size to suit application. E. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864 Option 1, Resilient extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. F. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Provide testing and analysis of glass to Section 01400. B. Test samples in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01400 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. GLAZING Section 08800 Page 4 END OF SECTION GLAZING Section 08800 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING) A. Cut glazing spline to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressurefor full continuous contact. E. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. C. Remove labels after Work is complete. D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK • A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work. B. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION GLAZING Section 08800 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 k SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL— Related ENERAL—Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract PP", specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. A"% 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Metal channel ceiling framing. w•+ C. Gypsum board D. Taped and sanded joint treatment E. Texture finish. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of surface mounted accessories. B. Section 08115 - Custom Steel Frames. C Section 09307 - Wall Tile: Wall Substrate Surface. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. 1.3 REFERENCES POW A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. B. ASTM C791- Gypsum Sheathing Board. C. ASTM C442 - Gypsum Backing Board and Core Board. D. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. E. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard. F. ASTM C557 - Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. G. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. H. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. ., I. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 J. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board. K. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. L. ASTM C931 - Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board. M. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. N. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. O. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. P. ASTM C1178 – Glass Mat Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. 1.4 SUBMITTALS _ A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape and finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM A. United States Gypsum. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. National Gypsum. 2. Gold Bond. 3. Georgia-Pacific C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01300. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; GA -216 and GA -600; galvanized sheet steel, 26 gage (0.48 mm) thick, C shape, with knurled faces. B. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. GA -216 and GA -600. — C. Fasteners: ASTM C514. ASTM C1002. GA -216. D. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 2 r 0 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. E. Adhesive: ASTM C557. F. Studs: ASTM A525, non -load bearing rolled steel, channel shaped, punched for utility access. G. Runners: Of same material and thickness as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs with provision for crimp locking to stud. Ceiling Runners: With extended leg retainer. H. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs; thickness to suit purpose. I. Fasteners: GA 203. Self drilling, self tapping screws. J. Sheet Metal Backing: 20 gage (0.9 mm thick) galvanized steel for reinforcement_ K. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated or Drilled expansion bolts. L. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20 Type I Inorganic zinc rich. FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies to sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements. FINISHES A. Studs: Galvanize to G60 coating class. Electro -galvanized. B. Tracks and Headers: Galvanize to G60 coating class. Electro -galvanized. C. Accessories: Same finish as framing members. GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Glass Mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel at ceramic tile: ASTM 01178; 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, maximum permissible length; ends and edges square cut. Heat cured co- polymer water and vapor retardant coating. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, un -faced, 2" (50 mm) thick. B. Acoustical Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. C. Corner Beads: Metal. D. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; Type LC, L, LK, U exposed reveal bead. E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; GA 201 and GA 216; tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. F. Textured Finish Materials: Latex based texturing material, containing fine silicone sand GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 3 0011 2.3 2.4 2.5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 aggregate. G. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12 and GA -216. H. Glass Mat water-resistant gypsum panel: 1. Joint tape: 2" wide, 10 by 10 glass mesh tape. 2. Reinforcing fabric: a. Joint Tape: 2" wide, 10 by 10 glass mesh tape. b. Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced, alkali -resistant open -weave glass fiber fabric, made from continuous multi -end strands with tensile strength of not less than 120 lbs. and 140 lbs. In warp and fill directions, respectively, per ASTM D 1682 and complying with ASTM D 578, and of 4.30 oz./sq. yd. minimum weight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 METAL STUD INSTALLATION A. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754.and manufacturer's instructions. B. Metal Stud spacing: 16 inch (400 mm) on center. 3.3 ERECTION A. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 16 inch (400 mm) oc. B. Place one beads of acoustical sealant between runners and substrate and studs and adjacent construction to achieve an acoustical seal. C. Place two bead of acoustic sealant between studs and adjacent vertical surfaces to achieve an acoustical seal. D. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall studs. E. Install studs vertically at 16 inch (400 mm) oc. 1.. Interior Stud Spacing and Gage: 16 inch (400 mm) o.c., 25 ga. for heights up to 13 ft. (4 m) 16 inch (400 mm) o.c., 20 ga. for all walls scheduled to receive ceramic the F. Align stud web openings horizontally. G. Secure studs to tracks using crimping method. Do not weld. H. Stud splicing not permissible. I. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 4 r�. Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 J. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than 2" (50 mm) from each side of openings. K. Brace stud framing system rigid. L. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames and window frames; install '^ supports and attachments. M. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and AM mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. N. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions, extend stud framing through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. O. Coordinate placement of insulation in stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection. k P. Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and other surface f. mounted equipment and fixtures. Q. Girts: Provide stud material placed horizontal in the wall at mid height of the partition or not to exceed 60" (1 520 mm) on center vertical. Girts shall be cut between and securely fastened with sheet metal screws to studs. Additional girts shall be placed at or within 12 (300 mm) of ceiling line in all partitions extending above ceiling. Girt at ceiling shall be full width of studs to provide effective fire stop, at the Contractor's option he may .•� substitute 1 112" (38 mm) cold -rolled plaster channel passing through openings in studs at girt location other than ceiling line. Cold rolled channels shall be securely attached to each stud. 3.3 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION A. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block and concrete walls. B. Erect furring channels vertically; space maximum 24 inch (600 mm) on center, not more than 4" (100 mm) from floor and ceiling lines. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inch (600 mm) on center. C. Erect free-standing metal stud framing concrete or concrete masonry walls, attached by adjustable furring brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. `.' 3.4 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: 1. Metal Framing: Two beads. 2. Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, and duct work and rough -in boxes. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 6 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 — 3.5 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Erect single layer board horizontal, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. D. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. T E. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as directed. F. Place corner beads at external corners . Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.6 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum .03 inches (0.8 mm). C. Taping, filling, and sanding is required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile. 3.7 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Section 09260 Page 6 �' Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 09306 ,,. FLOOR TILE _ PART GENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic tile floor and base finish using the thinset application method. B. Marble threshold at door opening. ,A. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Concrete Floor Finishing: Troweling of floor slab for tile application. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Mildew resistant sealant. C. Section 09307 - Wall Tile. D. Section 15440 - Plumbing Specialties: Floor drains. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI Al 08.1 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Portland Cement Mortar. B. ANSI Al 08.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. C. ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. D. ANSI A108.6 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile POW Setting and Grouting Epoxy. E. ANSI A108.8 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout. F. ANSI Al 08.9 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. G. ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework. . H. ANSI Al 18.1 - Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. r I. ANSI Al 18.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. J. ANSI Al 18.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. K. ANSI Al 18.5 - Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts for Tile Installation. 00% FLOOR TILE Section 09306 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 L. ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. M. ANSI A118.8 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. N. ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. O. ANSI A137.1 - Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. P. TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, and setting details. Show pattern at 1 inch equals 4 foot scale (1/4" / ft.) C. Product Data: Provide instructions for using adhesives and grouts. D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, 24" x 24" (600 x 600 mm) in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI A137.1. B. Conform to TCA Handbook, ANSI A108.1, ANSI A108.3, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, and ANSI Al 08.10. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. _ 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section -p 01400. FLOOR TILE Section 09306 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ,•� A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of mortar materials. r- 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide 3 1/2 sq ft. (1 sq m) of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE MANUFACTURERS PW A. Monarch. B. Mannington. C. Dal -Tile. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01400. r 2.2 CERAMIC TILE MATERIALS .•� A. Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile: TCA A137.1, conforming to the following: 1. Moisture Absorption 0 to 0.5 percent 2. Size 2 x 2 x 1/4" (50 x 50 x 6 mm) 3. Shape square POW 4. Edge cushioned 5. Surface Finish unglazed w 6. Color as scheduled ., 7. Mounted Sheet Size Manufacturer's Standard 2.3 BASE MATERIALS A. Ceramic Mosaic Tile Base: 1. Moisture Absorption 0 to 0.5 percent 2. Length tile length 2" (50 mm) 3. Height 6" (150 mm) 4. Top Edge square 5. Internal Corner coved 6. External Corner bullnosed 7. Surface Finish matte glazed 8. Color as scheduled FLOOR TILE Section 09306 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 2.4 ADHESIVE MATERIALS FLOOR TILE Section 09306 Page 4 A. Manufacturers: 1. Hydromet 2. TEC Incorporated -- 3. Bonsai B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type thinset bond type. 2.5 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hydromet 2. Bonsai 3. Mapel B. Mortar Materials: ANSI A118.4 Latex Modified, Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hydromet 2. Bonsai 3. Mapel B. Grout: ANSI A118.6, tile grout, color as scheduled. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 x 2" (50 x 50 mm) size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized. B. Thresholds: Marble type, white color, honed finish, detailed size by full width of wall or frame opening, beveled one side, or both sides, as detailed, radiused edges from bevel to vertical face. 2.8 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT MIX A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site made mortar bed and bond coat. B. Mix and proportion pre -mix setting bed and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. FLOOR TILE Section 09306 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 FLOOR TILE Section 09306 Page 5 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler D. Apply sealer to substrate surfaces in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - THINSET METHOD A. Install adhesive tile, thresholds, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. Diamond transitions shall constitute cause for removal of the work. C. Place thresholds at exposed tile edges and locations indicated. D. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base and wall joints. Place tile beginning in center of room allowing no less than �• one half tile width around perimeter. E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. .. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G. Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. I. Grout tile joints. J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.4 CLEANING .�, A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION FLOOR TILE Section 09306 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 09307 WALL TILE PART 1 GENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic tile wall, and base finish using the thinset application method. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Wall substrate surface. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Mildew resistant sealant. C. Section 09306 - Floor Tile. 1.3 REFERENCES _ p A. ANSI A108.1 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Portland Cement Mortar. B. ANSI A108.3 - Quarry Tile and Paver Tile Installed With Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSI A108.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile, with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. D. ANSI Al 08.5 - Installationof Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. "^ E. ANSI A108.6 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy. F. ANSI A108.8 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout. G. ANSI A108.9 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. H. ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework. L ANSI A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. J. ANSI Al 18.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. K. ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. L. ANSI A118.5 - Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts for Tile Installation. M. ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. WALL TILE Section 09307 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 1 0011 N. ANSI A118.8 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. O. ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. P. ANSI A137.1 - Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. Q. ASTM C847 - Metal Lath. R. TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the layout, patterns,color arrangement perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, and special shapes. Show pattern at 1 inch equals 4 foot scale. (1/4" / ft.) C. Product Data: Provide instructions for using adhesives and grouts. D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, 24" x 24" (600 x 600 mm) in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.ANSI A137.1. 1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI A137.1. B. Conform to TCA Handbook, ANSI A108.1, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, and ANSI A108.10,. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01400. 0 WALL TILE Section 09307 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of mortar materials. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. •. B. Provide 3 sq ft. (1 sq m) of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE MANUFACTURERS �— A. Dal -Tile Corp - Kohler Coordinates B. American Olean - Equivalent Color Ranges C. Summitville - Equivalent Color Ranges D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01400. 2.2 CERAMIC TILE MATERIALS A. Ceramic Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, 1988, conforming to the following: 1. Moisture Absorption 0 to 0.5 percent 2. Size 4 x 4 x 1/32" (107 x 107 x 8 mm) 3. Shape square 4. Edge cushioned 5. Surface Finish glazed 6. Color as scheduled 2.3 BASE MATERIALS A. Base: Specified as part of Section 09306 Wall Tile 2.4 ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hydroment Product Ultraset. 2. TEC Incorporated Product Double Duty. 3. Bonsal Product 13400. B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I thinset bond type. C. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, thinset bond type. Use epoxy adhesive for all exterior applications. WALL TILE Section 09307 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hydroment 2. Bonsal 3. Mapei Corporation B. Grout: ANSI A118.6, tile grout, color as scheduled. C. Grout: ANSI A118.8, modified epoxy emulsion mortar and grout, color as selected. Use epoxy grout for all exterior applications. 2.6 GROUT MIX A. Mix and proportion pre -mix setting bed and grout materials in accordance with _ manufacturer's instructions. TCA Handbook. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. _ D. Apply sealer to substrate surfaces in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - THINSET METHOD A. Install adhesive tile and grout to TCA Handbook Method Number W242-91. _ B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt the pattern through openings. Edge pieces less than one half tile. C. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base and wall joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal angles coved and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. WALL TILE Section 09307 Page 4 �" Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 11111151 H. Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. I. Allow the to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. J. - Grout tile joints. K. Apply sealant to junction of the and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. ,. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Clean tile and grout surfaces. END OF SECTION ia WALL TILE Section 09307 Page 5 I2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas SECTION 09900 0011 PAINTING AND FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL - Related Contract Documents` The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide complete painting and finishing of surfaces throughout interior and exterior of building, including mechanical and electrical equipment, unless otherwise noted not to be painted.` B. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this section. C. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, Monel metal, lead, and lead coated copper shall not be painted or finished except as otherwise specified or scheduled. D. Other surfaces not to be painted, unless otherwise noted, include pre -cast concrete panels, face brick; synthetic plaster, pre -finished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings; items with factory applied final finish; chases; and plenums above suspended ceilings, except as noted otherwise. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Submittals - Section 01400 B. Caulking and Sealing - Section 07900 •- C. Gypsum Drywall - Section 09250 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. B. Field Quality Control: Apply each type of finish required on a representative area or room for approval of color, texture, quality and workmanship. After approval; these applications shall serve as standard of quality for entire project. C. Reference Standards: ASTM C475-94 Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board Fed. Spec. Equivalents for Pratt and Lambert (P & L) follow: Vapex Flat Wall Finish TT -P -19D (2) Paint, Acrylic Emulsion: Exterior 01 June 92 Lyt-all Flowing Flat TT -P-29 (1) Paint, Alkyd, Odorless, Interior, Flat White and Tints 31 Aug 95, No. 38 Clear Finish TT -V -85C (1) Varnish, Oil, Low Sheen Brush or Spray Application 19 March 96 Effecto Paint TT -E -489J Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (For Exterior and Interior Surfaces) 7 Mar 94 Cellu-Tone A -A-50574(2) Enamel, Odorless, Alkyd, Interior, Semi -gloss, White and Tints 28 Feb 97 Vitrolite Enamel TT -E-545 (1) Enamel, Interior, Undercoat, Tints and White 28 Mar 73 Int. Trim Primer A -A-2994 (1) Enamel, Odorless, Alkyd, Interior -Undercoat Flat, Tints and PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 White 15 July 96 Noxide Metal Primer TT -P -645B Primer, Paint, Zinc Molybdate, Alkyd Type 12 March 90 ProHide Latex Flat TT -P-6500 (1) Primer Coating, Latex Base, Interior White (For Gypsum Wallboard) 25 Aug 88 Thorocoat TTC-555-B (1) Coating Textured (For Interior and Exterior Masonry Surfaces) 5 Aug 75 1.5 SAMPLES AND COLORS: A. Colors, including deep tomes, are scheduled. Number of colors to be used on job will be as scheduled. B. Prepare two 12" x 12" samples of each color and sheen selected, on properly prepared paint -out cards or hardboard. Approved samples shall remain at project site. C. Prepare stained wood samples on type and quality of wood specified for use on project. D. Submit 12" x 12" samples of drywall textures. E. Submit paint schedule in accordance with submittal requirements of Section 01400. List each surface and its proposed paint products and systems. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Submit substitute paint schedule listing each surface and its proposed products. B. Submit complete supporting data, specifications, and identifying numbers of each proposed product. C. Do not order or deliver materials until Architect's approval is obtained. 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of project site. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. C. Store clean rags, paint, and solvents in closed metal containers located. in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. Comply with applicable health and fire regulations. 1.8 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION: A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and painted work, and protect adequate finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. -- 1.9 EXTRA PAINT: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner one (1) gallon of each color of latex paint used, and two (2) quarts of each enamel color used PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 2 rte, Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Products specified in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured by Pratt and Lambert, unless otherwise indicated; equivalent products of Pittsburgh Paints, DuPont, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden, DeVoe, Cook and Kelly -Moore may be furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are of equal type and quality. B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. C. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. D. Lead Free Paint: All paint specified for use under this section shall be lead free and mercury free and shall be in full compliance with Federal Hazardous Substances Act. 2.2 MIXING AND TINTING: A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved by Architect. Use tinting colors recommended by paint manufacturer for specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed be manufacturer: do not exceed thinning directions. 2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: A. Compounds: Pre -fill powdered joint compound, taping compound and topping compound, ASTM C475-70. B. Joint Tape: Perforated tape, ASTM C475-70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finish for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of finish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work. B. Notify Architect in writing of such unacceptable conditions. C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating applications until conditions are suitable. f D. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. 3.2 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS: A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. B. Do not apply exterior paint while surface is damp, or during cold, rainy, or frosty weather, or when temperature is below 50 deg. F. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. C. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted, shall be clean before painting. PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 D. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges of doors same as balance of doors after they are fitted. Seal top, bottom, opening and hardware recesses immediately after hanging doors. E. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes. F. Maintain ambient temperature in building of not less than 60 deg. F. for 24 hours prior to and minimum of 24 hours after interior painting. G. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture content exceeding 12%. H. Provide a minimum of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. J. Apply materials with adequate ventilation; maintain ventilation in occupied rooms. 3.3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PAINTING REQUIREMENTS: 1. A. Paint metal surfaces, including pipes, conduit, machinery, equipment panels and boxes where exposed in finished spaces, mechanical rooms or on exterior. Paint equipment Machinery Gray unless otherwise noted. Paint pipes and conduits to match color of adjacent surfaces unless otherwise directed by Architect. B. Metal surfaces delivered with prime coat shall have abrasions touched up and finish coats applied as specified. C. Touch up abrasions in factory finishes. D. Paint exposed underside of cast iron sinks and fixture supporting members or structure with 2 coats of enamel. E. Paint galvanized ducts exposed to view on interior of building, including mechanical spaces, in accordance with painting schedule for galvanized metal. F. Paint air conditioning grilles, registers, ceiling diffusers and speaker grilles to match color of adjacent surfaces. G. Paint exposed conduit supports, clamps, hangers, and exposed conduit and boxes in accordance with painting schedule. H. Paint panelboards and other cabinets in accordance with painting schedule to match color of adjacent surfaces, when located in finished spaces other than closets or mechanical/electrical rooms. I. Paint surfaces inside of ducts, diffusers and other mechanical openings which are exposed to view flat black. J. Do not paint nameplates on equipment or labels on doors and frames. 3.4 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: A. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy spots with 2 Ib. cut shellac priming. B. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects with putty after first coat. Color to match finish. C. Sand woodwork smooth and clean surface before finishing. PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 D. Back -prime interior trim and cabinetry with tinted wood primer before installation. E. Paste wood filler, applied on open grain wood when "set" shall be wiped across grain of wood, then with grain to secure a clean surface. F. Coat surfaces to be stained with a uniform coat of stain and wipe excess off. G. Sand enamel or varnish finish on wood between coats using a fine sandpaper to produce an even, smooth finish. Thoroughly clean surfaces. H. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil, or grease before applying primer. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding clean before painting. Clean marred shop coats and touch up with primer. J. Pretreat galvanized metal surfaces with a crystalline zinc phosphate treatment such as Lithoform, by American Chemical Paint Co., Ambler, Pa., or Galvaprep #5, by Neilson chemical Co., Detroit, Mich. K. Fill scratches, cracks, and abrasions in drywall with a spackling compound flush with adjoining surface. When dry, sand smooth and seal before application of priming coat. L. Fill and sand metal door frames as required to provide a smooth surface before finishing. Touch-up factory prime coat before applying first coat. �+ M. Touch-up shop coats on metal surfaces before applying finish. N. All gypsum beard surfaces to receive ceramic tile or vinyl wall fabric shall be primed and sealed before application of adhesive. Primer shall be shellac unless otherwise recommended by adhesive manufacturer. O. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. P. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. ` 3.5 JOINT TREATMENT A. Treat joints, interior angles, fastener depressions and finishing trim on face -layer wallboard. Pre -fill, tape, fill and finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces smooth, uniform and free of fins, depressions, cracks and other ... imperfections. Treat joints of surfaces to receive ceramic tile or other finish wall material. Treat joints of all exposed face layers. 3.6 APPLICATION A. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. B. Apply paint, stain, and varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers, as recommended by manufacturer. Spray application will not be allowed. C. Allow previous coats to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. D. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no .� overlapping. PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 — E. Slightly vary color of successive coats. F. Sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects. G. Adjust transparent (natural) finishes to obtain matching appearance between doors and casework. H. Each coat of paint applied shall be inspected by Architect before application of succeeding specified coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats. Provide Architect a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection to comply with above. Architect reserves right to make revisions within color range of paint prior to final coat, at no additional cost. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet film (MWF) thickness specified in Schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. Additional coats shall be applied if required to produce full coverage. 3.7 CLEANING AND PATCHING: A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass, and other finished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable conditions. B. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. 3.8 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING - REMODEL WORK (where noted on Drawings): EXTERIOR METAL - ENAMEL FINISH - REMODEL WORK First : Remove loose paint, scale and dust. Prime where metal is exposed with Pratt & Lambert 1 -day primer. Second: Pratt & Lambert Effecto Enamel (MWF 2.7 mils) INTERIOR METAL - SEMI -GLOSS FINISH - REMODEL WORK First: Remove grease, rust, scale and dust. Touch-up any chipped or abraded places. Second: Pratt & Lambert Vitralite Enamel Eggshell (MWF 3.6 mils) INTERIOR WOODWORK - NATURAL FINISH TO REMAIN - REMODEL WORK First: Sand surfaces with 4/0 sandpaper. Second: Clean surfaces with Soilax surface conditioner. Third and Fourth: Dull Finish Varnish INTERIOR WOODWORK - ENAMEL FINISH - REMODEL WORK First: Clean surfaces with Soilax Second: Sand with 4/0 sandpaper Third: Wet surfaces with Pratt & Lambert surface conditioner -- Fourth and Fifth: Pratt & Lambert Vitralite Enamel Eggshell (MWF 3.6 mils) DRYWALL (Gypsum) CONSTRUCTION - LATEX FINISH - REMODEL WORK First: Clean and patch surfaces Second: Pratt & Lambert Vapex Flat Wall Finish (MWF 3.2 mils) Third: Pratt & Lambert Vapex Flat Wall Finish (MWF 3.2 mils) NOTE: Use this finish at all exposed gypsum board unless otherwise scheduled. DRYWALL (Gypsum) CONSTRUCTION - ENAMEL FINISH - REMODEL WORK First: Pratt & Lambert Double Duty Primer Second: Pratt & Lambert Vitralite Enamel Gloss or Eggshell (MWF 3.6 mils) NOTE: A uniform coverage will be required or additional coats shall be applied. Use enamel paint where scheduled on plans. PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 6 �' Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 INTERIOR CONCRETE BLOCK - LATEX FINISH - REMODEL WORK First Coat: Pratt & Lambert Vapex Flat Wall Finish (MWF 3.2 mils) Second Coat: Pratt & Lambert Vapex Flat Wall Finish (MWF 3.2 mils) INTERIOR MASONRY -ENAMEL FINISH -REMODEL WORK First: Pratt & Lambert Double Duty Primer Second: Pratt & Lambert Vitralite Enamel Gloss or Eggshell (MWF 3.6 mils) NOTE: A uniform coverage will be required, or additional coats shall be applied. Use enamel paint where scheduled on plans. INTERIOR INSULATED PIPE COVERINGS - REMODEL WORK First: Clean surfaces First Coat: Pratt & Lambert Lyt-All Flowing Flat (MWF 2.7 mils) NOTE: A full and uniform coverage will be required or additional coats applied. PIPES, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - ENAMEL FINISH - REMODEL WORK Clean surfaces and finish in accordance with specifications for interior metal. End of Schedule PAINTING AND FINISHING Section 09900 Page 7 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL— Related ENERAL—Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments, ceiling hung. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Framing within walls for partition panel support. B. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped B. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. C. ASTM A424 - Steel Sheet for Porcelain Enameling D. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. E. FS RR -P-1352 - Partitions, Toilet, Complete 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 B. Shop Drawings: Indicatepartition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall, and ceiling supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI A117.1 code for access for the handicapped. METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Section 10160 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01400. B. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall and ceiling. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Sanymetal - Century. B. Weis/Robart C. Global - Forum D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01400. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating. ASTM A424, Type 1, commercial quality 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoe: Formed ASTM A167 type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch (175 i mm) high, with adjustable screw jack. B. Head Rails: Hollow steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch (25 x 41 mm) size, with cast socket wall brackets. C. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type, heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets. D. Hardware: Chrome plated non-ferrous cast metal: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning. 2. Nylon bearings. 3. Thumb turn door latch. 4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper. 5. Coat hook with rubber bumper. 6. Door pull for out -swinging doors. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate partitions in accordance with FS RR -P-1352. B. Fabricate components of steel sheet as follows: 1. Panel and Door Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm). 2. Pilaster Faces: 18 gage (1.2 mm). 3. Reinforcement: 12 gage (2.5 mm). METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Section 10160 Page 2 60 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 C. Doors and Panels: EXECUTION 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) 3.1 EXAMINATION 2. Door Width: 24 inch (610 mm) A. 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch (915 mm) , out -swinging. _4. Height: 58 inch (1 473 mm) D. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick, of sizes required to suit cubicle width and spacing. E. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Sheet steel face, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, form and close edges, miter and weld corners, grind smooth. F. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark 3.2 INSTALLATION locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. 2.5 FINISHING Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize panels. B. Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel. C. Single Color: Color as scheduled, D. Stainless Steel Surfaces: No. 4 finish. E. Exposed Steel Surfaces: Satin chrome plated. F. Aluminum: Anodized to clear color. G. Non-ferrous Surfaces: Satin chrome plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01400. B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attached panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with [tamper proof] through bolts and nuts. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Install 30 inch (760 mm) wide x 42 inch (1 066 mm) high stainless steel protective splash METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS - - - Section 10160 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 — 3.3 3.4 panels on partitions adjacent to urinals. Fasten with stainless steel screws space 8 inches (200 mm) oc. F. Support pilasters from built-in framing using two adjustable hanging studs providing vertical leveling. Conceal ceiling fastenings with pilaster shoe. G. Equip each door with two hinges, one door latch, one coat hook and bumper; out swinging door with pull. H. Install door strike and keeper with door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. I. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. J. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm). ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm). C. Adjust hinges to position doors in 15 degrees partial opening position when unlatched. D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Section 10160 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 10441 OM PLASTIC SIGNS PART 1 GENERAL— on Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Engraved plastic signs. 1.2 REFERENCES ` A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making` Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable By Physically Handicapped People. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. " C. Samples: Submit one sample sign, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating type, style, letter font, and colors specified; method of attachment. Approved samples may be used. �., D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation template and attachment devices. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation Division of Architectural Barriers, Texas Accessibility Standards. code and ANSI A117.1 for requirements for the physically handicapped. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Package signs, labeled in name groups. C. Store adhesive attachment tape at ambient room temperatures. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by PLASTIC SIGNS Section 10441 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwell. 2. ASI Sign Systems. 3. Best Manufacturing Company. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. 2.2 ENGRAVED SIGNS A. Engraved Signs: Laminated colored plastic; lettering engraved through face to expose core color: 1. Face Color: Color as selected. 2. Core Color: White. 3. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch 4. Height: As detailed. 5. Edges: Beveled. _ 6. Character Font: As detailed. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install signs after surfaces are finished, in locations scheduled._ END OF SECTION PLASTIC SIGNS Section 10441 Page 2 e�+ Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL— Related Contract Documents: The contract agreement, the contract drawings, the contract specifications, contract general provisions, including general and supplementary conditions, and other documents or contract modifications incorporated into and made part of the contract by inclusion or reference, apply to this section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories. B. Grab bars. C. Attachment hardware. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: In wall framing and plates for support of accessories. B. Section 09307 - Wall Tile. C. Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped. B. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. er D. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. E. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. F. ASTM B456 — Electro deposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. G. NEMA LD -3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each component, illustrating color and finish. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Section 10800 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 — conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI A117.1 code for access for the handicapped. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. — 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01400. — B. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS — A. Bobrick. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bradley. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01400. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. D. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD -3, General Purpose Type; 0.125" (3.2 mm) thick, suede — finish. E. Adhesive: Contact type, waterproof. —. F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper -proof. G. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind joints of fabricated components, smooth. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents. C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment _ flanges. Form bar with 1.5 inches (38 mm) clear of wall surface. Knurl grip surfaces. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Section 10800 Page 2 i r Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 0011 2.4 KEYING A. Supply 3 keys for each accessory to Owner. B. Key all accessories. 2.5 FINISHES A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/ sq yd (380g/sq m). Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats electrostatic baked enamel. D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM 8456, Type SC 2 satin finish. E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01400. .-• B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ANSI A117.1. r"* B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Soap Dispensers: Provide one soap dispenser for each wall hung lavatory, countertop lavatory, sink and service sink as follows: B-8221 at wall hung lavatories and counter top lavatories. ' TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Section 10800 Page 3 rA* Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 B. Paper Towel Dispensers: Provide one roll towel dispenser at each wall hung lavatory, countertop lavatory, sink and service sink. Where more than one lavatory is indicated provide one dispenser for each pair of lavatories and two dispensers where three lavatories are shown. Dispensers shall be equal to the following: 1. Scott 9705 as manufactured by Scott Paper Company. C. Toilet Tissue Dispensers: Provide one toilet paper holder at each water closet as follows: 1. B-2730 at water closets. D. Grab Bars: Provide grab bars as follows: 1. One pair B-6206 x 42" with 2582 anchors at handicapped toilet compartments where shown on the Drawings. E. Mirrors: Type B: B165-1830 18" x 30" set bottom of mirror 36" above finish floor. Type A: B166-1836 18" x 36" with shelf at each public lavatory. END OF SECTION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Section 10800 Page 4 r Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 0011 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section: 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 15 Sections. 1. Escutcheons. 2. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 3. Cutting and patching. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. ,., 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 B. Pressure -Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color -coded, pressure -sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1. C. Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic -resin - laminate engraving stock; Grade ES -2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fabricate in sizes required for message. 2. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment identification. 3. Punch for mechanical fastening. 4. Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless-steel screws or contact -type permanent adhesive. D. Plastic Equipment Markers: Color -coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following color code: 1. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 2. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above. 3. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. C. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and rpm. 4. Size: Approximate 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment. E. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of. the_ Work,are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope. 3.2 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS - Section 15050 Page 2 r i Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot, uninsulated piping. 2. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior nonconcealed locations: a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious. C. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter nonaccessible enclosures. d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced at maximum of 50 -foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in congested areas of piping and equipment. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers. B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic -laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 -inch- high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 -inch- high lettering for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two- thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering. 2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 15050 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 0011 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS �-* A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP -58, factory -fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part,3. for where to use specific hanger and support types. 1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field -applied finish. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: 100 -psi minimum compressive -strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier. 2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass. 3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS >r, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Pagel Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 A. Mechanical -Anchor Fasteners: Insert -type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory -mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic -cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP -69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. D. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. E. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," is not exceeded. F. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. _. C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Page2 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas 2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees. 4. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 5. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. END OF SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15060 Page3 r Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. z B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums. .�, 2. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles. rw 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. W 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application. C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat -trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results. Y PIPE INSULATION Section 15083 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 0011 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. C. Owens -Coming Fiberglas Corp. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory -applied, all- purpose, vapor -retarder jacket. 2. Vapor -Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor -retarder mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL -C -19565C, Type ll. 3. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 4. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196. 5. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. 2.3 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. B. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory -fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20 -mil- thick, high -impact, ultraviolet -resistant PVC. 1. Shapes: 45- and 90 -degree, short- and long -radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick. B. Wire: 0.080 -inch, nickel -copper alloy; 0.062 -inch, soft -annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062 -inch, soft -annealed, galvanized steel. 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS PIPE INSULATION Section 15083 Page 2 — Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas Polk A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION '^ A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written a; instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do notq,corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs. E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Seal joints and seams with vapor -retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply insulation with the least number_of joints practical._ K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor - retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties. PIPE INSULATION Section 15083 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -retarder mastic. 1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. 3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield. M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3 -inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder. 4. Vapor -Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. 5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor -retarder mastic. P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors. 3.4 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor - retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor -retarder mastic. PIPE INSULATION Section 15083 Page 4 0"� Senior Citizen Center 0011 Polk Lubbock, Texas B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows: 1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows: 1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass -fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands. 3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass -fiber blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve ..- operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation. 3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor -retarder mastic. 3.5 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration -control devices. 3. Fire -suppression piping. 4. Below -grade piping, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury. 6. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality -control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect. I PIPE INSULATION Section 15083 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications. C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications. 3.7 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field -applied jackets. B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and jacket requirements. 3.8 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Domestic hot water and recirculating piping. 1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Copper Pipe, 1 inch: 4. Field -Applied Jacket: [None]. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None. B. Service: Domestic cold water. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Copper Pipe, 1 inch: 4. Field -Applied Jacket:None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None. C. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures for the disabled. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 120 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch 4. Field -Applied Jacket: PVC P -trap and supply covers. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. END OF SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION Section 15083 Page 6 _. .a. Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment inside the building. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings. 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with the following minimum working -pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 125 prig. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.2 COPPER TUBING A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME 816.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought - copper, solder -joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Section 15140 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B1 6.24, Class 150, with solder -joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. — 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces and solder -joint or threaded ends. 2.3 VALVES A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for bronze and cast-iron, general -duty valves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee -branch outlets and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. B. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: 1. NPS 3 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. All Services: Use bronze ball valves.. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. B. Install aboveground domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb. C. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. D. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Section 15140 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder, and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mechanically Formed Outlets: Form tee in copper tube according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install sectional, valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment. Use ball valves. B. Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball valves. 1. NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) inlet, hose -end drain valves may be adequate for this application. C. Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. 1. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop -and -waste drain valves where indicated. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate 11eneral arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. •. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Section 15140 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 0011 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until - satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. C. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. END OF SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Section 15140 Page 4 ON, Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building and to locations indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping systems specialties. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working -pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10 -foot head of water. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. own B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion - resistant metal band on each end. 2.2 PVC PIPING A. PVC Pipe: _ASTM D 2665, solid -wall drain, waste, and vent. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. B. Cellular -Core, Schedule 40, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING ,.. Section 15150 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. C. PVC Special Fittings: ASTM F 409, drainage-pattem tube and tubular fittings with ends as required for application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 to NPS 4: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping : Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 to NPS 6: Cellular -core, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent - cemented joints. - 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. B. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short -sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -tum, double Y -branch and 1/8 -bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. C. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at high point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. D. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING _. Section 15150 Page 2 AM Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. E. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665. F. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321. G. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. rC. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not *^ smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties." 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Section 15150 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 1811Tif l B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing -in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent -stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1 -inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Section 15150 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 0011 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities. B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpleces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general -duty valves are included where indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow -control rates for each type of fixture indicated. B. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PLUMBING FIXTURES Section 15410 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101- 336, "Americans with Disabilities Act'; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. E_ NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, Drinking Water System Components --Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Stainless -Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME Al 12.19.3M. 2. Vitreous -China Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.2M. H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1 M. 2. NSF Materials: NSF 61. 3. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 4. Sensor -Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 5. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME Al 12.18.1 M. I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower faucets: 1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1 M. 2. Hose -Coupling Threads: ASME 81.20.7. 3. Pipe Threads: ASME 61.20.1. J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME Al 12.18.1 M. 3. Manual -Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 4. Plastic Tubular Fittings and Piping: ASTM F 409. 5. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME All 12.18.1 M. K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Floor Drains: ASME Al 12.21.1 M. 2. Off -Floor Fixture Supports: ASME Al 12.6.1 M. 3. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 4. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 5. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate roughing -in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. PLUMBING FIXTURES Section 15410 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION '.,. 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify actual locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports match those indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing -in data if roughing - in data are not indicated. pow B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. For wall -hanging fixtures, install off -floor supports affixed to building substrate. 1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back -outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair -type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures. C. Install floor -mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate. D. Install wall -hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports. E. Install counter -mounting fixtures in and attached to casework. F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing -in drawings. G. Install water -supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general -duty valves. H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to ^~^ sanitary drainage system. I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system. J. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach. PLUMBING FIXTURES Section 15410 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas K. Install toilet seats on water closets. 0011 L. Install faucet -spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. M. Install water -supply, flow -control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. N. Install faucet, flow -control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. O. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. P. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattem escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons. Q. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary -type, one -part, mildew -resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures. C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping. D. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to plumbing piping. E. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing piping. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. PLUMBING FIXTURES Section 15410 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. ., 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 15410 rQ MW PLUMBING FIXTURES Section 15410 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center 0011 „ Lubbock, Texas SECTION 15430 AM PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following: 1. Water distribution systems. 2. Soil, waste, and vent systems. 3. Storm drainage systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, basic installation requirements, and labeling and identifying requirements; and escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals that are not in this Section. 2. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for water -supply piping and connections. 3. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for drainage and vent piping and connections. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working -pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig. 2. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10 -foot head of water. .., 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected equipment and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products: 1. Water hammer arresters. �., 2. Trap seal primer valves and systems. 3. Drain valves. 4. Hose bibbs, hydrants, and sanitary post hydrants. 5. Cleanouts. 6. Floor drains, open receptors, and trench drains. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Section 15430 Pagel Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 7. Vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies. B. Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 0011 A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other. manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified standards. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. E. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRANTS A. Wall Hydrants: ASME Al 12.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining, antibackflow type, key operation, with 3/4 -inch NPS threaded or solder -joint inlet, and ASME B1.20.7 garden - hose threads on outlet. Include operating key for each hydrant. 1. Type: Recessed. 2. Finish: Nickel bronze. 2.2 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES A. Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water -supply -fed type, with the following characteristics: 1. 125-psig minimum working pressure. 2. Bronze body with atmospheric- vented drain chamber. 3. Inlet and Outlet Connections: 1/2 -inch NPS threaded, union, or solder joint. 4. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: 1/2 -inch NPS threaded or solder joint. 5. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. B. Trap Seal Primer System: Factory -fabricated, automatic -operation assembly for wall mounting with the following: 1. Piping: 3/4 -inch NPS, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper, water tubing inlet and manifold with number of 1/2 -inch NPS outlets as indicated. 2. Cabinet: Steel box with stainless-steel cover. �. 3. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V, ac power. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Section 15430 Page2 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas 4. Water Hammer Arrester: ASSE 1010. 5. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001. 2.3 DRAIN VALVES �. A. Hose -End Drain Valves: MSS SP -110, 3/4 -inch NPS ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP. Include 2 -piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome -plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout -proof stem, and vinyl -covered steel handle. 1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 2. Outlet: Short -threaded nipple with ASME 81.20.7 garden -hose thread and cap. .• 3. Hose -End Drain Valve Option: MSS SP -80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 body, with 3/4 -inch NPS threaded or solder -joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7 garden -hose threads on outlet and cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application. Stop -and -Waste Drain Valves: MSS SPA 10, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimum CWP or MSS SP -80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with 1/8 -inch NPS side drain outlet and cap. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME All 12.26.1 M, ASSE 1010, or PDI -WH 201, bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water -supply fixture units, ASME Al 12.26.1 M sizes A through F and PDI -WH 201 sizes A through F. B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, 1/2- or 3/4 -inch NPS threaded or solder joint inlet. Provide ASME B1.20.7 garden -hose threads on outlet and integral or field - installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose -connection vacuum breaker. 1. Finish: Rough brass. 2. Operation: Wheel handle. C. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub -and -spigot, cast-iron, soil -pipe fittings. Include P -trap, hub -and -spigot riser section of length to provide depth indicated; and where indicated, increaser fitting of size indicated, joined with ASTM C 564 rubber gaskets. Size P -trap as indicated. D. Deep -Seal Traps: Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping, cleanout where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection where indicated. 1. 2 -Inch NPS: 4 -inch- minimum water seal 2. 2-1/2 Inch NPS and Larger. 5 -inch- minimum water seal E. Floor -Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection. F. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop -fabricated or field -fabricated, frost -proof assembly constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead -coated copper. Size to provide f- inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing, as indicated. 2.5 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Section 15430 Page3 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas A. Description: UL 1479, through -penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast -in-place concrete slabs. 2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Use: 4 Ib/sq. ft. or 0.0625 -inch thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3 Ib/sq. ft. or 0.0469 -inch thickness. 3. Burning: 6 Ib/sq. ft. or 0.0937 -inch thickness. B. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 -mil minimum thickness. C. Solder. ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION A. General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install hose bibbs with integral or field -installed vacuum breaker. C. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of one percent and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. D. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated, according to the following: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to 4 -inch NPS. Use 4 -inch NPS for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4 -inch NPS and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. E. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors. F. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping. G. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors with waterproof membrane. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Section 15430 Page4 -. Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas PON H. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Install frost -proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1 -inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. J. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated. 1. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage K. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. L. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. M. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. _ N. Fasten wall -hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated. O. Fasten recessed, wall -mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls. °^ P. Secure supplies to supports or substrate. Q. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. R. Install water -supply stop valves in accessible locations. S. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. T. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and drains. U. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattem escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings: V. Include wood -blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall -mounting plumbing specialties. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections., Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping connections between plumbing specialties and piping specified in other Division 15 Sections. 2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other Sections; connect directly to plumbing piping systems. 3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and equipment specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to plumbing piping systems. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Section 15430 Page5 L" Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for connections. C. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold -water -supply piping of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Ground electric -powered plumbing specialties. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. F. Arrange for electric -power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power. Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." E. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and tum down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. F. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install drain connection if indicated. 3.4 COMMISSIONING A. Before startup, perform the following checks: 1. System tests are complete. 2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. 3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties. B. Before operating systems, perform the following steps: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Section 15430 Page6 M Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas 2. Open general -duty valves to fully open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers. 4. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear. C. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If no procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows: 1. Energize circuits for electrically operated units. Start and run units through complete sequence of operations. D. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Section 15430 Page7 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas , SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat -oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10 -inch wg. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct - mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 2. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k -Value): As defined in ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W. 1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k -Value): 0.26 or 0.037. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air -moving and -distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. PFR 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance PM requirements. B. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed accessories and devices. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE METAL DUCTS Section 15815 Pagel Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 A. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle sealant and _firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written recommendations. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; . mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view. B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. 2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod. 1. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNXs "HVAC Duct Construction Standards— Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates. 2.3 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification. 2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations. B. Static -Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following: 1. Exhaust Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure with seal Class "B". C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger. METAL DUCTS Section 15815 Page2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 0011 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated. C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections. E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. F. Install duds, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install duds with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. 1. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless specifically indicated. J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke -control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. L. Non -Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where duds pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and dud or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as dud. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. M. Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Dud Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." B. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation. 3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING 61 METAL DUCTS Section 15815 Page3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 A. Install rigid round and rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage testing and as required for compliance with test requirements. B. Conduct tests, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2 -inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications of 3 -inch wg. E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable. F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." — 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust volume -control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow. B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures. 3.7 CLEANING After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system and remove dust and debris before final acceptance. END OF SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS Section 15815 Page4 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas SECTION 15838 POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations. B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished' specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound -power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. B. Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. POWER VENTILATORS Section 15838 Pagel Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fans as factory -assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. — 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators: a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. b. Cook, Loren Company. C. Greenheck Fan Corp. d. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Description: Belt -driven or direct -driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories. B. Housing: Removable, spun -aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle ; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1. Upblast Units: Provide spun -aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow drains. C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades. D. Belt -Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features: 1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self -aligning ball bearings. 3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. E. Accessories: 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal -overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. POWER VENTILATORS Section 15838 Page2 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas 2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2 -inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel -blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to Gose when fan stops. F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded comers; 1 -1/2 -inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1 -172 -inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. Configuration: Self -flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange . •- 2. Overall Height: 12 inches. 3. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized steel hinged arrangement permitting service and maintenance. 0. G. 2.3 MOTORS A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory -installed motors. B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. C. Enclosure Type: Open dripproof. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound -Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Secure roof -mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium -plated hardware. C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Dud installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of duds and dud accessories. Make final duct POWER VENTILATORS Section 15838 Page3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 connections with flexible connectors. Flexible, connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment. D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4866. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Equipment Startup Checks: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and -- adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. B. Starting Procedures: 1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage. C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. E. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. F. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Lubricate bearings. POWER VENTILATORS Section 15838 Page4 - P" Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet. B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove buns, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 15838 POWER VENTILATORS Section 15838 Pages I Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas I SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall -mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles. oft #. _ 1_ 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor. B. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details. 2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet. �., 3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS P" a" 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings and shall be manufactured by Titus, Metalaire, or Nailor, no exceptions. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES Section 15855 Pagel Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances _ and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards. B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with notify location. installation, noti Architect for a determination, of final C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. 3.4 CLEANING A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Section 15855 Page2 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 0011 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical identification. 3. Touchup painting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. B. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. PART 2 - PRODUCTS BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 16050 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock, Texas 2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES 0011 A. Material: Cold -formed steel, with corrosion -resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot -dip galvanized steel. C. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16 -inch- diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs. D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C -clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring -steel clamps or click -type hangers. E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable -iron casting with hot -dip galvanized finish. G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon -steel wedge or sleeve type. H. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel. 2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 1. Type: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color -coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies. 2. Color. Black letters on orange background. 3. Legend: Indicates voltage. C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick. D. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. E. Color -Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. F. Engraved -Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16 -inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 -inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background. G. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 16050 Page 2 P-% Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas 2.3 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match 'installed equipment finish. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION A. Dry Locations: Steel materials. B. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four, minimum of 200 -ib design load. 3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. "^ Provide U -bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits. C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers. D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future. E. _ Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable -iron pipe hangers or clamps. F. Install 1/4 -inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS "' Section 16050 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 G. Spring -steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable -iron hangers for 1 -1/2 -inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet -metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box ,and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength. L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core - drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire -rated gypsum walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: 1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails. 2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 3. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 4. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided -- with lock washers may be used in existing concrete. 5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring -tension clamps on steel. a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS 131.1. 6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items. 7. Light Steel: Sheet -metal screws. 8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof -test load. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. C. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS -- Section 16050 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows: 1. Bands: Pretensioned, snap -around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive marking tape. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50 - foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 -foot maximum intervals in congested areas. E. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color -coding may be used for voltage and phase identification. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire -resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: 1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical identification. 3. Electrical demolition. 4. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 5. Touchup painting. 3.7 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. 2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ow Section 16050 Page 5 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 0011 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General_ and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. B. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Foreach type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1. Comply with UL 467. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Boggs, Inc. C. Chance/Hubbell. d. Copperweld Corp. GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16060 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas e. Dossert Corp. f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. g. Framatome Connectors/Bumdy Electrical h. Keamey/Cooper Power Systems. i. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. j. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. k. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 0011 2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." B. Material: Copper. C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green -colored insulation. D. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows; 1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. E. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators. 2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted -pressure-type connectors, or compression type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors. B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16060 Page 2 r� Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in addition to those required by NEC: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. '"' 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Flexible raceway runs. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic- welded xothermicwelded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect -type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. C. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided -type bonding straps. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors. C. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. D. Compression -Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by .,., connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. E. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable. END OF SECTION 16060 r GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16060 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas «- SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed and "Labeled As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver wires and cables according to NEMA WC 26. r* 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations. B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as approved by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Section 16120 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wires and Cables: a. American Insulated Wire Corp.; Leviton Manufacturing Co. b. BICC Brand -Rex Company. C. Carol Cable Co., Inc. d. Senator Wire & Cable Company. e. Southwire Company. 2. Connectors for Wires and Cables: a. AMP Incorporated. b. General Signal; O-Z/Gedney Unit. C. Monogram Co.; AFC. d. Square D Co.; Anderson. e. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. 2.2 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES A. UL -listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction, and rating as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article. B. Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 5. C. Conductor Material: Copper. D. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger than No. 10 AWG. 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. UL -listed, factory -fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. Comply with Project's installation requirements and as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway. B. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES -- Section 16120 Page 2 0 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas C. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHNlrHWN, in raceway. D. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHNfrHWN, in raceway. CZ8ilfil O 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's "Standard of Installation." B. Remove existing wires from raceway before pulling in new wires and cables. C. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. .. F. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." G. Seal around cables penetrating fire -rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Firestopping." H. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum. B. Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. C. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with conductor material. D. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap connector for aluminum conductors. E. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. F. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. m.• G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. END OF SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Section 16120 Page 3 Senior Citizens Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical Wiring. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and identification products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and, Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agecy acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART2-PRODUCTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES Section 16130 Page 1 Senior Citizens Center Lubbock, Texas 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 8. O -Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal B. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 1. Fittings: Compression type. C. FMC: Zinc -coated steel. D. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Crouse -Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 8. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1._ C. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Cast -Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. G. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: _NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R as required with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. H. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R as required, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturers standard RACEWAYS AND BOXES Section 16130 Page 2 Senior Citizens Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 2.3 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: 1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC. A-* B. Indoors: 1. Concealed: EMT. 2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 3. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 -inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. E. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. RACEWAYS AND BOXES Section 16130 Page 3 Senior Citizens Center Lubbock, Texas 0011 G. Conceal conduit and . EMT within finished_ walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated. H. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. 1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. 1. Terminations: 1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -Ib tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. K. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. L. Install hinged -cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each comer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing installation of exposed, factory -finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES -- Section 16130 Page 4 , Ow I Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 0011 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with NEMA WD 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. 1. Wiring Devices: a. Bryant Electric, Inc. b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices. d. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. e. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. f. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. WIRING DEVICES Section 16140 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas g. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. h. Pyle -National, Inc.; an Amphenol Co. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Straight -Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy -Duty grade. B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed -through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2 -3/4 -inch- deep outlet box without an adapter. C. Isolated -Ground Receptacles: Equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. 1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated -ground receptacles. 2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 2.3 SWITCHES A. Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type. B. Snap Switches: General -duty, quiet type. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.04 -inch- thick, Type 302, satin -finished stainless steel 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth plastic. 2.5 FINISHES A. Color: white where installed on white finished walls, ivory on light colored walls and brown and dark colored walls. Coordinate with Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. B. Install wall plates when painting is complete. WIRING DEVICES Section 16140 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas C. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. D. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. E. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone/power service poles are installed to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. 2. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served on the inside face of cover plate. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. B. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch -circuit equipment grounding conductor. C. isolated -Ground Receptacles: Conned to isolated -ground conductor routed to designated isolated equipment ground terminal of electrical system. D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque - tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4868. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six times. B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Replace damaged or defective components. 3.5 CLEANING A. Intemally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices. END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES Section 16140 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 0011 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types: 1. Lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PANELBOARDS "" Section 16442 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler -Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. G. Square D Co. 2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES A. Enclosures: Surface mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet environmental conditions at installed location. B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box. C. Hinged Front Cover. Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer coat. E. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panelboard door. F. Bus: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. G. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. H. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. 1. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service disconnect switches. J. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. K. Skirt for Surface -Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. PANELBOARDS - Section 16442 Page 2 EK. Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. B. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2.6 CONTROLLERS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. F. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1 -inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1 -inch empty conduits into raised floor space- or below slab not on grade. G. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. PANELBOARDS Section 16442 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 3.3 CONNECTIONS 0011 A. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows: 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data-processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS Section 16442 Page 4 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas SECTION 16511 LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 0011 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. " 1.2 A. 1.3 A. SUMMARY This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and the following: 1. Dimensions of fixtures. 2. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and photometric data. 3. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance. 4. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 5. Fluorescent and high -intensity -discharge ballasts. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with NFPA 70. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs. COORDINATION Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling system and other construction. 1�:71��i1 General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 16511 Page 1 1.4 A. B. C. 1.5 A. 1.6 .•. A. SUMMARY This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and the following: 1. Dimensions of fixtures. 2. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and photometric data. 3. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance. 4. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 5. Fluorescent and high -intensity -discharge ballasts. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with NFPA 70. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs. COORDINATION Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling system and other construction. 1�:71��i1 General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 16511 Page 1 Senior Citizen Center Lubbock,Texas 0011 be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available_ Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp comers, and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and ultraviolet radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum, unless greater thickness is indicated. 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS A. General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following: 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 3. Sound Rating: A. B. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following, besides those in "General Requirements" Paragraph above: 1. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification:_ Indicated by label. 2. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound. INTERIOR LIGHTING -- Section 16511 Page 2 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock,Texas 3. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. 2.4 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER SUPPLY UNIT A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924. 1. Test Switch and Light -Emitting Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. 2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type with minimum 10 -year nominal life. 3. Charger. Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type. 4. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when normal supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamp, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 2.5 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color -Rendering Index: 3500 K and 85 CRI, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on rapid -start circuits. 2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for channel- and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 2.7 FINISHES A. Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture. 3.2 CONNECTIONS INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 16511 Page 3 Senior Citizen Center 0011 Lubbock, Texas A. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. — 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Tests: As follows: 1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. 2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. 3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. 4. Report results in writing. C. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. D. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period. — 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 16511 Page 4